Menu

Luke 8:24 — Word Study

Depth

N1904προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

BSAHaving come to [Him]proserchomai thende they awokediegeirō Himautos saying;legō Masterepistatēs [Lord, Commander] Master,epistatēs we are perishing!apolluō [dying, being destroyed] <the>ho Andde having arisen upegeirō He rebukedepitimaō [warned, scolded] theho windanemos [air, breath] andkai theho ragingkludōn [turbulent, violent] of theho water.hudōr, hudatos andkai they ceased,pauō [ceased, stopped] andkai there wasginomai a calm.galēnē [peaceful, serene]

Word
Listen & take awayLuke 8
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 24 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (galēnē) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Luke 8:24quick helps
In a sentenceThe disciples wake Jesus in panic, fearing for their lives, and He calms the storm.
Who is speakingThe disciples address Jesus as Master.
Where we areThis event occurs during a perilous journey across a lake.
The hard wordἀπολλύμεθα
Take awayJesus has authority over nature, bringing peace in the midst of chaos.
6 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Ellicott & more — read them › clause subjectπροσέρχομαι verbπροσέρχομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Luke 8:24

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Jesus Calms the Stormgenerated

23As they sailed, He fell asleep, and a windstorm came down on the lake, so that the boat was being swamped, and they were in great danger.
24The disciples went and woke Him, saying, “Master, Master, we are perishing!” Then Jesus got up and rebuked the wind and the raging waters, and they subsided, and all was calm.
25“Where is your faith?” He asked. Frightened and amazed, they asked one another, “Who is this? He commands even the winds and the water, and they obey Him!”
26Then they sailed to the region of the Gerasenes, across the lake from Galilee.

Luke 8:24 describes a moment of crisis for the disciples as they face a violent storm while Jesus sleeps. Their fear leads them to awaken Him, crying out for help. This narrative illustrates both the disciples' desperation and Jesus' power over the elements, demonstrating His divine authority and care for His followers. The passage serves as a reminder of faith in the face of fear and uncertainty.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Psalm 69:1–2Save me, O God, for the waters are up to my neck.
2Psalm 116:3–4The ropes of death entangled me; the anguish of Sheol overcame me; I was confronted by trouble and sorrow.
3Psalm 142:4–5Look to my right and see; no one attends to me. There is no refuge for me; no one cares for my soul.
4Lamentations 3:54–56The waters flowed over my head, and I thought I was going to die.
5John 2:2–6and Jesus and His disciples had also been invited to the wedding.

The Key Word ἀπολλύμεθα, apolluōgenerated

The verb ἀπολλύμεθα is in the present tense, indicating an ongoing action of perishing or being destroyed. It is a middle voice form, suggesting the action is affecting the subjects themselves — the disciples feel they are in the process of perishing.

This word captures the intensity of the disciples' fear as they face what seems to be certain death. It encompasses both physical destruction and the emotional turmoil of feeling overwhelmed and helpless.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In the Berean Standard Bible, the phrase is rendered as we are perishing!, which conveys the urgency of the disciples' situation. The WEB translates it as we are dying!, emphasizing the same sense of imminent danger.

The translations diverge primarily in the rendering of this Greek word. The BSB and MSB choose perishing, while the WEB opts for dying, both capturing the disciples' fear but with slightly different nuances.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main clause is introduced by the verb διήγειραν, they awoke, which governs the action of the disciples waking Jesus. The structure includes a participial phrase describing their action of approaching Him and a series of clauses detailing their exclamation and the subsequent actions of Jesus.

The sentence is complex, with multiple clauses that build upon each other: the disciples' action leads to Jesus' response, which results in the calming of the storm. Each part of the structure is tightly interwoven, showing the flow of events.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The term ἀνέμῳ corresponds to the Hebrew word for wind, רוּחַ, which appears in the Septuagint. This connection emphasizes the continuity of God's control over nature from the Old Testament through the New Testament.

The word κλῦδων is also found in the Septuagint, where it describes tumultuous waters, linking the imagery of storms in both the Hebrew Scriptures and the New Testament.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Luke 8:24 tells us that during a dangerous storm on the lake, the disciples woke Jesus, fearing they would die. They called out to Him, and He responded by calming the wind and the waves, bringing peace to the situation.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that the disciples were perishing?

It indicates their fear of drowning in the storm, feeling that their lives were in grave danger.

Why did the disciples wake Jesus?

They woke Him because they were terrified and believed He could help them in their time of need.

How did Jesus respond to the storm?

Jesus rebuked the wind and the raging waters, and they immediately calmed down.

What does this passage teach us about faith?

It shows that even in fearful situations, we can trust in Jesus' power and presence.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How do I respond in times of fear or crisis?
  2. What does this passage teach me about trusting in Jesus?
  3. In what ways can I recognize Jesus' authority in my life?
  4. How can I support others who are feeling overwhelmed or afraid?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on this passage, discussing the disciples' fear and Jesus' authority over nature.

Augustine of Hippode Cons. Ev. l. 2. c. 24. 354–430
Matthew says, Master, save us, we perish. Mark, Master, carest thou not that we perish? There is the same expression in all of men awakening our Lord, and anxious for their safety.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 8 →
BedeOn the Gospel of Luke c. 673–735
They approached and woke Him up, saying: Master, we are perishing! The disciples awaken the Lord to prevent them from perishing due to the savagery of the waves while He sleeps,
Early Church Fathers on Luke 8 →
BedeOn the Gospel of Luke c. 673–735
But He, rising, rebuked the wind and the raging water, and they ceased, and there was calm. Rising, He rebuked the wind, because, having celebrated the resurrection,
Early Church Fathers on Luke 8 →

Commentators on this verse — 6 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Luke 8:24 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And they came to him, and awoke him,.... That is, the disciples came from some part of the ship, to the hinder part of it, where Christ was asleep; and by their shrieks and cries, and repeated

Read John Gill on Luke 8 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Now it came to pass on a certain day, that he went into a ship with his disciples: and he said unto them, Let us go over unto the other side of the lake. And they launched forth.

Read Robert Jamieson on Luke 8 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

24 And they came to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, master, we perish. Then he arose, and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water: and they ceased, and there was a calm. Ver. 24. See Matthew 8:23; Mark 4:36.

Read John Trapp on Luke 8 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(24) Master, master.—We note another characteristic feature of Luke’s phraseology. The Greek word (epistatès) which he, and he only, uses in the New Testament, is his equivalent, here and elsewhere, for the “Rabbi” or “Master” (didaskalos), in the sense of “teacher,” which we find in the other Gospels. St. Luke uses this word also, but apparently only in connection with our Lord’s actual work as a teacher, and adopts epistatès (literally, the head or president of a company, but sometimes used also of the head-master of a school or gymnasium) for other occasions. It was, as this fact implies, the more classical word of the two. The raging of the water.—Literally, the wave or billow of the…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Luke 8 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

24. we perish] Rather, we are perishing! “Lord! save! we are perishing,’ Matthew 8:25. “Rabbi, carest thou not that we are perishing?” Mark 4:38. The peril was evidently most imminent.Then he rose] Rather, But He, being roused from sleep.rebuked the wind] speaking to the wind and the billows of the water as though they were living powers (Psalms 106:9, “He rebuked the Red Sea also”), or to the evil powers which may be conceived to wield them to the danger of mankind. St Mark alone preserves the two words uttered “Hush! be stilled!” the first to silence the roar, the second the tumult. St Matthew tells us that He quietly uttered ‘Why are ye cowards, ye of little faith?’ and then, having…

Read Cambridge on Luke 8 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

§ 50.—THE OF , vv. AND THE TEMPEST STILLED, Luke 8:22-25.(See notes on Matthew 8:18-27; Mark 4:35-41.)

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Luke 8 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

The disciples went and woke Him, saying, “Master, Master, we are perishing!” Then Jesus got up and rebuked the wind and the raging waters, and they subsided, and all was calm.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

They came to him and awoke him, saying, “Master, Master, we are dying!” He awoke and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water; then they ceased, and it was calm.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

The disciples went and woke Him, saying, “Master, Master, we are perishing!” Then Jesus arose and rebuked the wind and the raging waters, and they subsided, and all was calm.

NETBNew English Translation2006

They came and woke him, saying, “Master, Master, we are about to die!” So he got up and rebuked the wind and the raging waves; they died down, and it was calm.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And they came to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, master, we perish. Then he arose, and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water: and they ceased, and there was a calm.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And they came to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, master, we perish. And he awoke, and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water: and they ceased, and there was a calm.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And they came to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, master, we perish. And he awoke, and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water: and they ceased, and there was a calm.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And they came to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, master, we perish. Then he arose, and rebuked the wind, and the raging of the water: and they ceased, and there was a calm.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Then they went to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, Master, we perish. And he arose, and rebuked the winde, and the waues of water: and they ceased, and it was calme.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

and coming to [him] they woke him up, saying, Master, master, we perish. But he, rising up, rebuked the wind and the raging of the water; and they ceased, and there was a calm.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And having come near, they awoke him, saying, 'Master, master, we perish;' and he, having arisen, rebuked the wind and the raging of the water, and they ceased, and there came a calm,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And having come near, they awoke Him, saying, “Master, Master, we perish!” And He, having arisen, rebuked the wind and the raging of the water, and they ceased, and there came a calm,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Then Jesus' disciples came over to him and woke him up, saying, “Master! Master! We are about to die!” He awoke and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water, and they ceased, and there was a calm.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And they came and awaked him, saying: Master, we perish. But he arising, rebuked the wind and the rage of the water; and it ceased, and there was a calm.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

They went over to Jesus and woke him up. “Master, master, we're going to drown!” they said. Jesus woke up and commanded the wind and the rough waves to stop. They stopped, and all was calm.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Then they came to him and, awaking him out of his sleep, said, Master, Master, destruction is near. And he, when he was awake, gave orders to the wind and the rolling waves, and the storm came to an end, and all was calm.

Word by word, the decisions they made

προσελθόντεςproserchomai Having come to [Him] G4334 3 different renderings
cameASV BBE DRA KJV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
having come nearLSV YLT
comingDBY
ἀπολλύμεθα.apolluō we are perishing! G622 2 different renderings
perishingBSB MSB
dyingWEB
ὕδατος.hudōr, hudatos water. G5204 2 different renderings
waterASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
watersBSB MSB
ἐπαύσαντο,pauō they ceased, G3973 2 different renderings
ceasedASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
they stoppedFBV
ἐγένετοginomai there was G1096 4 different renderings
there wasASV DBY DRA KJV NWB RVA ULB
wasBSB FBV GNV MSB
cameBBE NETB WEB
having comeLSV YLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲthenclauseadverbialπροσελθόντεςHaving come to [Him]verbδιήγειρανthey awokeobjectαὐτὸνHimclause · adverbialclauseverbλέγοντεςsayingclauseἘπιστάταMasterclauseἐπιστάταMasterclauseverbἀπολλύμεθαwe are perishingclauseδὲAndclausesubject-adverbialδιεγερθεὶςhaving arisenverbἐπετίμησενHe rebukednoun phrase · objectnoun phraseτῷtheἀνέμῳwindκαὶandnoun phraseτῷthenoun phraseκλύδωνιragingnoun phraseτοῦof theὕδατοςwaterclauseκαὶandclauseclauseverbἐπαύσαντοthey ceasedκαὶandclauseverbἐγένετοthere wassubjectγαλήνηa calm

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Accedentes autem suscitaverunt eum, dicentes : Præceptor, perimus. At ille surgens, increpavit ventum, et tempestatem aquæ, et cessavit : et facta est tranquillitas.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܩܪܒܘ ܐܥܝܪܘܗܝ ܘܐܡܪܝܢ ܠܗ ܪܒܢ ܪܒܢ ܐܒܕܝܢܢ ܗܘ ܕܝܢ ܩܡ ܘܟܐܐ ܒܪܘܚܐ ܘܒܡܚܫܘܠܐ ܕܝܡܐ ܘܢܚܘ ܘܗܘܐ ܫܠܝܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ διεγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

προσελθόντες δὲ διήγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες· ἐπιστάτα ἐπιστάτα, ἀπολλύμεθα. δὲ ἐπετίμησεν τῷ ἀνέμῳ καὶ τῷ κλύδωνι τοῦ ὕδατος. καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη.¶

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
διεγερθεὶς having arisen upNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Luke 8:24προσέρχομαιHaving comeHaving come to προσέρχομαιδέthenthenδέδιεγείρωthey awokethey awokeδιεγείρωαὐτόςHimHimαὐτόςλέγωsaying;saying;λέγωἐπιστάτηςMasterMasterἐπιστάτηςἐπιστάτηςMaster,Master,ἐπιστάτηςἀπόλλυμιwe are periwe are perishinἀπόλλυμι<the><the>δέAndAndδέδιεγείρωhaving arishaving arisen uδιεγείρωἐπιτιμάωHe rebukedHe rebukedἐπιτιμάωthetheἄνεμοςwindwindἄνεμοςκαίandandκαίthetheκλύδωνragingragingκλύδωνof theof theὕδωρwater.water.ὕδωρκαίandandκαίπαύωthey ceasedthey ceased,παύωκαίandandκαίγίνομαιthere wasthere wasγίνομαιγαλήνηa calm.a calm.γαλήνηἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίδιάPrep. throPrep. through, διάπρόςPrep. to, Prep. to, towarπρόςἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἀπόPrep. fromPrep. from, awaἀπόἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦφημίv. I sayv. I sayφημίὑετόςn.m. rainn.m. rainὑετόςἄνεμοςn.m. the wn.m. the windἄνεμοςὑπόμνησιςn.f. rememn.f. remembrancὑπόμνησιςἀπόλλυμιv. I destrv. I destroy, lἀπόλλυμιΚαφαρναούμProp.n. CaProp.n. CapernaΚαφαρναούμἅπτωv. I touchv. I touch or hἅπτωἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνδιδάσκαλοςn.m. a tean.m. a teacherδιδάσκαλοςἀσκόςn.m. a winn.m. a wine-skiἀσκόςψυχήn.f. the sn.f. the soul, ψυχή
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Luke 8:24

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
προσελθόντεςproserchomai Having come to [Him] G4334 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
87× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To approach or come near, like when people visited Jesus in Matthew 4:11 and Luke 9:42, or when we draw near to God in Hebrews 12:18 and 22
Tyndale gloss
to come near/agree
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

προσέρχομαι (proserchomai) means to approach or draw near, often in a physical or metaphorical sense, such as approaching God in worship. It appears frequently in the New Testament, including in Matthew and Hebrews, and can also imply consent or agreement, as seen in 1 Timothy 6:3. The word is built from the components for 'to' and 'come,' and its usage spans various contexts, including both literal and figurative approaches.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προσ-έρχομαι,

[in LXX for קרב, נגשׁ, etc.;]

to approach, draw near: absol., Mt 4:11, Lk 9:42, al.; c. infin., Mt 24:1, al.; c. dat. loc., He 12:18, 22; dat. pers., Mt 5:1, and freq., Jo 12:21, al.; ptcp., προσελθών, c. indic., Mt 8:2, and freq., Mk 1:31, Lk 7:14, al.; π. αὐτῷ, c. indic., Mt 4:3, Mk 6:35. Metaph.,

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

προσέρχομαι. The semi-technical use of this verb of the approach of the worshipper to God is frequent in the LXX, and is found septies in Heb, twice (10! 33) without an obj. : cf. P Giss I. 204 (beg. ii/a.p.) (= Chrest. I. p. 124) ἀξιώσεις ody δίστιXov αὐτῶι γραφῆναι, ἵνα ἀξίως σου kal τῶν θεῶν ἀόκνως προσέλθῃ, of worship to be performed at a private shrine of the Dioscuri. See also Dio Cassius ἵν]. 9 τοῖς θεοῖς προσερχώμεθα. The verb is similarly used of approach to a court in P Oxy VIII. rr1g® (A.D. 254) προσήλθομεν τῇ κρατίστῃ βουλῇ. Other exx. of προσέρχομαι c. dat. are P Oxy I. 7622 (A.D. 179) οὐκ οὖσα δὲ προαιρέσεως προσέρχεσθαι τῇ τούτου κληρονομίᾳ, ‘Cas I have no intention of entering on his inheritance ’’ (Edd.) (cf. adire hereditatem), and P Ryl II. 2348 (ii/A.D.) per’ dJACyov δέ μου προσελθόντος τῷ y[pap]paret. The absol. use is seen in P Oxy I. 40* (ii/iii A.D.)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προσέρχομαι (proserchomai) — to come near/agree.

προσέρχομαι,

imperfect -ηρχόμην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: future -ελεύσομαι[Refs 2nd c.BC+]aorist -ήλυθον, -ῆλθον: perfect -ελήλυθα:—come or go to, with dative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. Σωκράτει visit him as teacher, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τινὶ ὥσπερ ἀθλητῇ Th. [prev. cited] (see. προσάρχομαι); αἷς ἂν προσέλθω [γυναιξί] [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with adverbs, π. δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐγγύθεν, ὄπισθεν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, approach, draw nigh, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of pain, pleasure, etc., to be nigh at hand, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. in hostile sense, attack, π. πρὸς τοὺς ἱππέας [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. come in, surrender, capitulate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

προσέρχομαι

proserchomai

from 4314 and 2064 (including its alternate); to approach, i.e.

(literally) come near, visit, or (figuratively) worship, assent

to:--(as soon as he) come (unto), come thereunto, consent, draw near,

go (near, to, unto).

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 2064

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προσέρχομαι

v.

I come near, consent to

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προσέρχομαι proserchomai 86x

to come or go to any one, approach, Mt. 4:3, 11; 5:1; 8:19, 25, et al. freq.; trop. to come or go to, approach, draw near, spiritually, Heb. 7:25; 11:6; 4:16; 1 Pet. 2:4; met. to assent to, accede to, concur in, 1 Tim. 6:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προσέρχομαι imperf. -ηρχόμην fut. -ελεύσομαι the attic imperf. and fut. are προσῄειν, πρόσειμι aor2 -ήλυθον aor2 -ῆλθον perf. -ελήλυθα Dep.:

to come or go to, c. dat., Aesch., etc.; πρ. Σωκράτει to visit him as teacher, Xen.:—c. dat. loci, Aesch., Eur.; also c. acc. loci, Eur.; often also with Preps., ἐπί, εἰς, πρός: and with Advs., δεῦρο, πέλας:—absol. to approach, draw nigh, be nigh at hand, Hdt., Soph.

in hostile sense, πρ. πρός τινα Xen.

to come in, surrender, capitulate, Thuc.

to come forward to speak, πρ. τῷ δήμῳ Dem.; πρὸς τὸν δῆμον Aeschin.

to associate with one, πρός τινα Dem.

to come in, of revenue, Lat. redire, Hdt., Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
21%came
came21% · 18×having come18% · 16×having come to13% · 11×having come up6% · 5×having gone5% · 4×having come near3% · 3×drawing near3% · 3×having approached3% · 3×other renderings28% · 24×

87 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb61%adverbial39%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 87 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οἰκίαa house, househoλόγοςa word, speech, πορεύομαιI travel, journe
τότεthen
πάρειμιI am present, am
δέbut, on the other ha
ὕστεροςlastly, afterwarμικρόςlittle, smallArticle the
Article the
δύναμαιI am powerful, aδεῖit is necessary,
ΚαφαρναούμProp
εἰς
προσέρχομαιHaving come to [Him]87×
what comes after →
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
αὐτός
Article theλέγωI say, speakἑκατοντάρχηςa centurion
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theκαίand, even, also,διεγείρωI wake out of sl
καίand, even, also, nam
διακονέωI wait at table,Article theκολλάωI glue, cleave,
προσκυνέωI worship
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροσέρχομαι · 87× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke Hebrews Mark 1 Peter 1 Timothy John
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 144c. AD 40

συγγενής τε καὶ ἀγχίσπορος ὢν τοῦ ἡγεμόνος, ἅτε δὴ πολλοῦ ῥυέντος εἰς αὐτὸν τοῦ θείου πνεύματος, πάντα καὶ λέγειν καὶ πράττειν ἐσπούδαζεν εἰς ἀρέσκειαν τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ βασιλέως, ἑπόμενος κατ’ ἴχνος αὐτῷ ταῖς ὁδοῖς, ἃς λεωφόρους ἀνατέμνουσιν ἀρεταί,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.77c. AD 75–95

καὶ προσελθὼν ἐμήνυσεν αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰώσηπον τήν τε ὄψιν, ἣν αὐτὸς εἶδεν ἐν τῇ εἱρκτῇ, καὶ τὸ ἀποβὰν ἐκείνου φράσαντος, ὅτι τε σταυρωθείη κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν ἡμέραν ὁ ἐπὶ τῶν σιτοποιῶν κἀκείνῳ τοῦτο συμβαίη κατὰ ἐξήγησιν ὀνείρατος Ἰωσήπου προειπόντος.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 17.3c. AD 96

καὶ μὴ μόνον ἄρτι δοκῶμεν πιστεύειν καὶ προσέχειν ἐν τῷ νουθετεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅταν εἰς οἶκον ἀπαλλαγῶμεν, μνημονεύωμεν τῶν τοῦ κυρίου ἐνταλμάτων καὶ μὴ ἀντιπαρελκώμεθα ἀπὸ τῶν κοσμικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν, ἀλλὰ πυκνότερον…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Lond. 2 p. 165-166 no. 357Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 14

ὡρισμένοις δικαίοις, ἀλλὰ ἐπιχειροῦντος ἀφαρπάσαι τὰ ἐπιβάλλοντα αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ὑποκείμενα καὶ φιλάνθρωπα, προσῆλθεν στρατηγῷ ἀξιῶν με στέρεσθαι καὶ ἀξιῶ, ὑποτεταγμένος τῆς τοῦ δανείου συνγραφῆς τὸ ἀντίγραφον, ἐὰν

P.Iand. 3 27Euhemeria? (Arsinoites)AD 101–AD 102

ὅλαις ἀρούραις να ὡς πρόκειται, ὕστερον δὲ μεθʼ ἣν ἐποιησάμεθα κατασπορὰν Λυσᾶς τις Ἀπολλωνίου προσελθὼν ταῖς σημαινομέναις ἀρούραις η ὡς ἀγεωργήτοις οὔσαις ὑπέστη αὐτῶν ἐκφόρια τελέσειν ἀνὰ κριθῆς ἀρτάβας

P.Brookl. 3Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 137

δῶναι τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ ἀφανὴς ἐγένετο, βαστάξας μου καὶ χείλωμα ἐν ᾧ νέα ζωνή· προσελθόντων δὲ ἡμῶν τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ πυροῦ ἠρνήσατο μήτε ἀργύριον εἰληφέναι μήτε εἰδέναι

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
δὲde then G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέthen2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
διήγειρανdiegeirō they awoke G1326 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To arouse, as in Luke 8:24 and Mark 4:39, means to wake or stir someone fully, either physically or mentally, like calming a storm or stirring one's mind to remember important things, as in 2 Peter 1:13
Tyndale gloss
to arouse
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διεγείρω means to fully wake or arouse, both literally and figuratively. It is built from the prefix δι- (meaning 'completely') and the root ἐγείρω (to awaken). The term covers a range of uses, from waking someone from sleep to stirring up emotions or thoughts. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like calming a storm (Mark 4:39) and encouraging believers (2 Peter 1:13).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** δι-εγείρω

[in LXX: Jth 1:4, Es 1:1, II Mac 7:21 15:10, III Mac 5:15 * ;]

to arouse completely, arouse as from rest or sleep: Lk 8:24; pass., Mk 4:39, Lk 8:24; of the sea, Jo 6:18. Metaph., of the mind: ἐν ὑπομνήσει, II Pe 1:13 3:1.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δι-εγείρω ; 1 aor. διήγειρα; Pass., impf. διηγειρόμην [but Tr WH (Tedd. 2, 7) διεγείρετο in Jn. vi. 18, cf. B. 34 (30); WH. App. p. 161]; 1 aor. ptep. διεγερθείς ; to wake up, awaken, arouse (from repose; differing from the simple eyeipw, which has a wider meaning); from sleep: τινά, Mk. iv. 38 [here T Tr WH eyeipovow]; Lk. viii. 24; pass., Lk. viii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; Mk. iv. 39; with the addition ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, Mt. i. 24 (LT Tr WH ἐγερθείς) ; from repose, quiet: in pass. of the sea, which begins to be agitated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the mind; stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1, as in 2 Mace. xv. 10, τινὰ τοῖς θυμοῖς. (Several times in the O.T. Apocr. [ef. W. 102 (97)]; Hippoer., [Aristot.], Hdian.; occasionally in Anthol.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διεγείρω Numb 144, we may quote P Lille I. 2811 (iii/B.c.) αὐτοῖς ἐδώκαμεν μεσίτην Δωρ[(Πὠν[α, ‘nous leur avons donne pour arbitre Dorion’’ (Edd.), P Flor I. 253 (a.p, 265) δίδομεν καὶ προσαγγέλλομεν τὸν ὑπογεγραμμένον εἰς δεσμοφυλακείαν : cf. 7b. 91° (ii/A.D.) ἐδόθην εἰς ἑϊ τέραν αὖ λιτουργία]ν, and P Oxy IX. 1195! (A.D. 135) ᾿Απολλωνίωι κριτῆι δοθέντι ὑπὸ Tletpwvlov Μαμερτείνου τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος. Similarly Deissmann (Z4£, p. 117) disposes of the “ Latinism ”’ in Lk 1258 by reference to a letter of B.C. 2 written in vulgar Greek, P Oxy IV. 7421, δὸς ἐργασία[ν, ‘give your attention to it,’’ and to the occurrence of the same phrase in the unpublished P Bremen 18 (c. A.D. 118), He also cites OG/S 441° (b.c. 81) φροντίζωσιν διδῶσίν τε ἐργασίαν, “may they take heed and give diligence’’ (but see Dittenberger’s note). Ilerwerden (Zev. s.v.) illustrates the elliptical use (e.g. Rev 2538)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διεγείρω (diegeirō) — to arouse.

διεγ-είρω,

wake up, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; stir up, arouse, [LXX]; excite, promote, αὔξησιν φυτοῦ [Refs]:—passive, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; to be raised up from a sick-bed, [Refs 1st c.AD+]aorist διέγρετο[Refs]

II. raise, τὸν αὐχένα [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, πύλας διεγειρομένας εἰς ὕψος πηχῶν ἑβδομήκοντα [LXX+5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

διεγείρω

diegeiro

from 1223 and 1453; to wake fully; i.e. arouse (literally or

figuratively):--arise, awake, raise, stir up.

see GREEK for 1223

see GREEK for 1453

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διεγείρω

v.

I wake out of sleep, I arouse

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διεγείρω diegeirō 6x

to arouse or awake thoroughly, Mt. 1:24; Mk. 4:38, 39; Lk. 8:24; pass. to be raised, excited, agitated, as a sea, Jn. 6:18; met. to stir up, arouse, animate, 2 Pet. 1:13; 3:1

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
17%stir up
stir up17% · 1×i am stirring up17% · 1×having been awoken17% · 1×they awoke17% · 1×having arisen up17% · 1×agitated17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb67%adverbial33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δέbut, on the other ha
προσέρχομαιI come near, conArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
πνέωI blow
μέγας
σκήνωμαa dwelling
Article the
ὅς
ἐν
διεγείρωthey awoke
what comes after →
ἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide, adm
Article the
σύ
ἐν
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιεγείρω · 6× in the New Testament
2 Peter Luke John Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.82c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὲ ταύτην τὴν ὄψιν διεγερθεὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὕπνου καὶ τεταραγμένος ὢν καὶ τί ποτʼ εἴη τὸ φάντασμα παρʼ ἐμαυτῷ σκοπῶν καταφέρομαι πάλιν εἰς ὕπνον καὶ δεύτερον ὄναρ ὁρῶ πολὺ τοῦ προτέρου θαυμασιώτερον, ὅ με καὶ μᾶλλον ἐκφοβεῖ καὶ ταράττει.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
αὐτὸνautos Him G846 Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-ASM — Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-ASM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςHim5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
λέγοντες·legō saying; G3004 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
2,255× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to say or speak, and it is used by Jesus and others in the New Testament to share teachings and tell stories. It appears in Matthew 9:34 and John 1:29.
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λέγω (legō) — to say.

λέγω,

__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

lego

a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate

(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and

5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech

respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980

means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,

bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),

shew, speak, tell, utter.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 2980

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λέγω

v.

I say, speak

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%saying
saying35% · 480×says13% · 175×i say12% · 164×he says9% · 122×say5% · 70×he was saying3% · 42×they say2% · 31×other renderings17% · 225×other renderings4% · 48×

1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτός
πρόςμαθητήςa learner, disciἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδέbut, on the otheγόνυa knee
ἀμήνHebr
ἀμήνHebrαὐτόςλέγωI say, speak
λέγωsaying;2255×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeter
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becοὐNegἐάνCond
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπρόςαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theοὗτοςσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλέγω · 2,255× in the New Testament
Luke John Matthew Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians James Galatians

76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἐπιστάταepistatēs Master G1988 Noun · vocative · singular · masculine
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A master is a person in charge or a commander, as seen in Luke 5:5 and 8:24. This term is used to describe Jesus as the master of his disciples. It implies a sense of authority and leadership.
Amplified meaning
Lord, Commander
Tyndale gloss
master
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιστάτης (i.e., *epistates*) is derived from the verb ἐφίστημι and generally means a master or commander. It appears in the New Testament exclusively in the Gospel of Luke, where it is used to address Jesus, reflecting authority rather than a formal teaching role. The term also has broader meanings, including overseer or superintendent, as seen in various contexts in classical literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπιστάτης, -ου, ό

(< ἐφίστημι),

[in LXX: IV Ki 25:19, Je 36(29):26 52:25 (פָּקִיד), II Ch 31:12 (נָגִיד), II Mac 5:22, etc. ;]

a chief, commander, master: Lk 5:5 8:24, 45 9:33, 49 17:13 (cf. Dalman, Words, 336 ff.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπιστάτης, -ov, ὁ, (ἐφίστημι), any sort of a superintendent or overseer (often so in prof. writ., and several times in Sept., as Ex. i. 11; v.14; 1 K. v.16; 2 K. xxv. 19; Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii 2; xxxi.12); a master, used in this sense for "3 by the disciples [ef. Lk. xvii. 13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus “ not from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his authority” (Bretschneider) ; found only in Luke: v. 5; Vili. 24,45; ix. 33,49; xvii. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιστάτης in its original sense of ‘‘ superintendent,”’ ‘© overseer,” found in a number of different connexions, e.g. ἐ. εἰρήνης κώμης (P Oxy I. 642—iii/iv a.D.), ἐ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ (P Par 26727— B.C. 163) and τῶν ἱερῶν (P Leid Gt—end of ii/B.c.), ἐτῆς πόλεως (BGU III. 1006°—iii/B.c.), & τῶν φυλακιτῶν (P Tebt I. 5159. 5. Ὁ. 118). For further particulars regarding ἐ. τῆς κώμης, a local justice, see Archiv iv. p. 35 fi, and for ἐ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ Preisigke Prinz-Joachim-Ostr p. 60 ff., and for the word generally Preisigke Fachworter, p. 89 f. The verb ἐπιστατέω is found in P Oxy XII. 14137 (A.D. 270-5). In connexion with the Lukan use of the subst. applied to Jesus instead of the Hebrew Ῥαββί in the sense of ‘Master,’ Rouffiac (Recherches, p. 56f.) refers to an ἐπιστάταν τῶν παίδων (JG XII. 1, 43), apparently a sort of headmaster, and to τὸν émurta[tny τὸ]ν τῶν ἐφήβῳν, whose duty it was τ[ὰς ψυχ]ὰς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιστάτης (epistatēs) — master.

ἐπιστᾰτ-ης, ου, ὁ,

(ἐφίσταμαι) one who stands near or by: hence, like{ἱκέτης}, suppliant, οὐ σύ γ᾽ ἂν.. σῷ ἐπιστάτῃ οὐδ᾽ ἅλα δοίης [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. in battle-order, one's rear-rank man, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. b. also, even numbers in a λόχος, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

II. one who stands or is mounted upon, ἁρμάτων ἐ., of a charioteer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐλεφάντων ἐ., of the driver, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II.2. one who is set over, chief, commander, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποιμνίων ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐρετμῶν ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θύματος ἐ. [Refs]; but ταύρων πυρπνόων ζεύγλῃσι mastering them with.., [Refs]; ἐνόπτρων καὶ μύρων, of the Trojans, [Refs]; ἐ. Κολωνοῦ, of a tutelary god, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [καιρὸς] ἀνδράσιν μέγιστος ἔργου παντός ἐστ᾽ ἐ. [Refs]; also in…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιστάτης

epistates

from 1909 and a presumed derivative of 2476; an appointee over, i.e.

commander (teacher):--master.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 2476

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιστάτης, ου, ὁ

n.m.

master, teacher

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιστάτης epistatēs 7x

pr. one who stands by; one who is set over; in NT in voc., equivalent to διδάσκαλε, or ῥαββί, master, doctor, Lk. 5:5; 8:24, 45; 9:33, 49; 17:13*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιστάτης ἐπιστάτης, ου, ἐφίσταμαι one who stands near or by, a suppliant, Od.

in battle-order, one's rear-rank man (as παραστάτης is the right- or left-hand man, προστάτης the front-rank man), Xen.

one who stands or is mounted upon a chariot, c. gen., Soph., Eur.

one who is set over, a commander, Trag.; ἐπιστ. Κολωνοῦ, of a tutelary god, Soph.; ἐπ. ἄθλων president, steward of the games, a training- master, Xen.

at Athens the President of the βουλή and ἐκκλησία, Aeschin., Dem.

an overseer, superintendent, in charge of any public works, id. Dem.

the caldron for the hot bath which stood over the fire, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-VSM — Noun · vocative · singular · masculine
vocative — the one being addressed.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-VSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Vocative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mas'-ter ('adhon, ba`al, rabbi; despotes, didaskalos, kurios, rhabbi): "Master," when the translation of 'adhon, "ruler," "lord" (Sir), often translated "lord," denotes generally the owner or master of a servant or slave (Ge 24:9, etc.; 39:2, etc.; Ex 21:4, etc.; De 23:15 bis; 2Sa 9:9,10 twice; Pr 30:10); elsewhere it is rather "lord" or "ruler" (often king, e.g. 1Sa 24:6,8; 26:16); in the plural 'adhonim, it is, as the rule, used only of God (but see Ge 19:2,18;

→ Jesus called Mt 8:19; 10:25; 23:8; 26:18,25,49; Mr 14:45; Lu 8:24; Joh 13:13,14

→ Jesus prohibited the appellation Mt 23:8

→ SCRIPTURES RELATING TO MASTERS OF SERVANTS Ex 21:20,21,26,27; Le 19:13; 25:43; De 5:14; 24:14,15; Job 31:13-15; Pr 22:16; 29:12,21; Jer 22:13;

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC
BGU 16 2613Herakleopolites15 BC

Σέλευκος Ἀθηνοδώρωι τῶι ἀδελφῶι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ἐρρῶσθαι· Ἡρᾶς ὁ ἐπιστάτης καὶ Ἀρτεμᾶς ὁ γραμματεὺς καὶ Ἡρακλᾶς τοῦ Ἐβήους ἐντετεύχασι ὡς ἐνοχλούμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν παρὰ

BGU 16 2600Choinothmis (Herakleopolites)14 BC

σμηνῶν καὶ τοῦ μεμετρημένου μέλιτος ἐν τῶι ια ἔτει· ἐὰν οὖν σοι φαίνηται, σεμνότατε ἐπιστάτα, ἐπιδεῖξαι Σελεύκωι τῶι διοικητῆι καὶ κυρίωι συμπροσγενόμενος αὐτῶι, ἵνα μὴ πλεῖον ἀπαιτηθῶμεν τῶν ὄντων

P.Dura 17Dura - EuroposAD 180

δισχιλίας καὶ τὴν ἔκστασιν ταύτην εἶναι καὶ οὕτως κυρίαν. … μάρτυρες· Ἡλιόδωρος στρατηγὸς καὶ ἐπιστάτης τῆς πόλεως … … Κόνων Νικοστράτου.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἐπιστάτα,epistatēs Master, G1988 Noun · vocative · singular · masculine
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A master is a person in charge or a commander, as seen in Luke 5:5 and 8:24. This term is used to describe Jesus as the master of his disciples. It implies a sense of authority and leadership.
Tyndale gloss
master
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιστάτης (i.e., *epistates*) is derived from the verb ἐφίστημι and generally means a master or commander. It appears in the New Testament exclusively in the Gospel of Luke, where it is used to address Jesus, reflecting authority rather than a formal teaching role. The term also has broader meanings, including overseer or superintendent, as seen in various contexts in classical literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπιστάτης, -ου, ό

(< ἐφίστημι),

[in LXX: IV Ki 25:19, Je 36(29):26 52:25 (פָּקִיד), II Ch 31:12 (נָגִיד), II Mac 5:22, etc. ;]

a chief, commander, master: Lk 5:5 8:24, 45 9:33, 49 17:13 (cf. Dalman, Words, 336 ff.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπιστάτης, -ov, ὁ, (ἐφίστημι), any sort of a superintendent or overseer (often so in prof. writ., and several times in Sept., as Ex. i. 11; v.14; 1 K. v.16; 2 K. xxv. 19; Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii 2; xxxi.12); a master, used in this sense for "3 by the disciples [ef. Lk. xvii. 13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus “ not from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his authority” (Bretschneider) ; found only in Luke: v. 5; Vili. 24,45; ix. 33,49; xvii. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιστάτης in its original sense of ‘‘ superintendent,”’ ‘© overseer,” found in a number of different connexions, e.g. ἐ. εἰρήνης κώμης (P Oxy I. 642—iii/iv a.D.), ἐ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ (P Par 26727— B.C. 163) and τῶν ἱερῶν (P Leid Gt—end of ii/B.c.), ἐτῆς πόλεως (BGU III. 1006°—iii/B.c.), & τῶν φυλακιτῶν (P Tebt I. 5159. 5. Ὁ. 118). For further particulars regarding ἐ. τῆς κώμης, a local justice, see Archiv iv. p. 35 fi, and for ἐ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ Preisigke Prinz-Joachim-Ostr p. 60 ff., and for the word generally Preisigke Fachworter, p. 89 f. The verb ἐπιστατέω is found in P Oxy XII. 14137 (A.D. 270-5). In connexion with the Lukan use of the subst. applied to Jesus instead of the Hebrew Ῥαββί in the sense of ‘Master,’ Rouffiac (Recherches, p. 56f.) refers to an ἐπιστάταν τῶν παίδων (JG XII. 1, 43), apparently a sort of headmaster, and to τὸν émurta[tny τὸ]ν τῶν ἐφήβῳν, whose duty it was τ[ὰς ψυχ]ὰς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιστάτης (epistatēs) — master.

ἐπιστᾰτ-ης, ου, ὁ,

(ἐφίσταμαι) one who stands near or by: hence, like{ἱκέτης}, suppliant, οὐ σύ γ᾽ ἂν.. σῷ ἐπιστάτῃ οὐδ᾽ ἅλα δοίης [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. in battle-order, one's rear-rank man, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. b. also, even numbers in a λόχος, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

II. one who stands or is mounted upon, ἁρμάτων ἐ., of a charioteer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐλεφάντων ἐ., of the driver, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II.2. one who is set over, chief, commander, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποιμνίων ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐρετμῶν ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θύματος ἐ. [Refs]; but ταύρων πυρπνόων ζεύγλῃσι mastering them with.., [Refs]; ἐνόπτρων καὶ μύρων, of the Trojans, [Refs]; ἐ. Κολωνοῦ, of a tutelary god, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [καιρὸς] ἀνδράσιν μέγιστος ἔργου παντός ἐστ᾽ ἐ. [Refs]; also in…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιστάτης

epistates

from 1909 and a presumed derivative of 2476; an appointee over, i.e.

commander (teacher):--master.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 2476

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιστάτης, ου, ὁ

n.m.

master, teacher

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιστάτης epistatēs 7x

pr. one who stands by; one who is set over; in NT in voc., equivalent to διδάσκαλε, or ῥαββί, master, doctor, Lk. 5:5; 8:24, 45; 9:33, 49; 17:13*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιστάτης ἐπιστάτης, ου, ἐφίσταμαι one who stands near or by, a suppliant, Od.

in battle-order, one's rear-rank man (as παραστάτης is the right- or left-hand man, προστάτης the front-rank man), Xen.

one who stands or is mounted upon a chariot, c. gen., Soph., Eur.

one who is set over, a commander, Trag.; ἐπιστ. Κολωνοῦ, of a tutelary god, Soph.; ἐπ. ἄθλων president, steward of the games, a training- master, Xen.

at Athens the President of the βουλή and ἐκκλησία, Aeschin., Dem.

an overseer, superintendent, in charge of any public works, id. Dem.

the caldron for the hot bath which stood over the fire, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-VSM — Noun · vocative · singular · masculine
vocative — the one being addressed.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-VSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Vocative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mas'-ter ('adhon, ba`al, rabbi; despotes, didaskalos, kurios, rhabbi): "Master," when the translation of 'adhon, "ruler," "lord" (Sir), often translated "lord," denotes generally the owner or master of a servant or slave (Ge 24:9, etc.; 39:2, etc.; Ex 21:4, etc.; De 23:15 bis; 2Sa 9:9,10 twice; Pr 30:10); elsewhere it is rather "lord" or "ruler" (often king, e.g. 1Sa 24:6,8; 26:16); in the plural 'adhonim, it is, as the rule, used only of God (but see Ge 19:2,18;

→ Jesus called Mt 8:19; 10:25; 23:8; 26:18,25,49; Mr 14:45; Lu 8:24; Joh 13:13,14

→ Jesus prohibited the appellation Mt 23:8

→ SCRIPTURES RELATING TO MASTERS OF SERVANTS Ex 21:20,21,26,27; Le 19:13; 25:43; De 5:14; 24:14,15; Job 31:13-15; Pr 22:16; 29:12,21; Jer 22:13;

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC
BGU 16 2613Herakleopolites15 BC

Σέλευκος Ἀθηνοδώρωι τῶι ἀδελφῶι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ἐρρῶσθαι· Ἡρᾶς ὁ ἐπιστάτης καὶ Ἀρτεμᾶς ὁ γραμματεὺς καὶ Ἡρακλᾶς τοῦ Ἐβήους ἐντετεύχασι ὡς ἐνοχλούμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν παρὰ

BGU 16 2600Choinothmis (Herakleopolites)14 BC

σμηνῶν καὶ τοῦ μεμετρημένου μέλιτος ἐν τῶι ια ἔτει· ἐὰν οὖν σοι φαίνηται, σεμνότατε ἐπιστάτα, ἐπιδεῖξαι Σελεύκωι τῶι διοικητῆι καὶ κυρίωι συμπροσγενόμενος αὐτῶι, ἵνα μὴ πλεῖον ἀπαιτηθῶμεν τῶν ὄντων

P.Dura 17Dura - EuroposAD 180

δισχιλίας καὶ τὴν ἔκστασιν ταύτην εἶναι καὶ οὕτως κυρίαν. … μάρτυρες· Ἡλιόδωρος στρατηγὸς καὶ ἐπιστάτης τῆς πόλεως … … Κόνων Νικοστράτου.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἀπολλύμεθα.apolluō we are perishing! G622 Verb · present · middle · indicative · first person · plural
90× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to destroy or lose something completely, and is used in the Bible to describe physical or spiritual destruction, such as in Matthew 10:28 and John 6:39. It can also mean to perish or die. Jesus uses it to warn against causing others to stumble.
Amplified meaning
dying, being destroyed
Tyndale gloss
to destroy
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπόλλυμι (*apollumi*) is built from the prefix ἀπ- and a root meaning to destroy. It covers a range of meanings including to destroy, kill, lose, or perish, both literally and metaphorically. In the New Testament, it is used to describe destruction and loss of life, as seen in verses like Matthew 10:28. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπ-όλλυμι and ἀπολλύω,

[in LXX for אבד, etc. (38 words in all)].

Act.,

to destroy utterly, destroy, kill: Mk 1:24, 9:22, al.; τ. ψνχήν, Mt 10:28, al.;

to lose utterly: Mt 10:42, al.; metaph., of failing to save, Jo 6:39 18:9.

Mid.,

to perish;

of things: Mt 5:29, Jo 6:12, He 1:11(LXX), al.;

of persons: Mt 8:26, al. Metaph., of loss of eternal life, Jo 3:15, 16 10:28 17:12, Ro 2:12, I Co 8:11 15:18,

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπόλλυμι. One or two instances of the literal use of this common verb will suffice—P Petr III. 51° τὸ ἀργύριον ὃ ὥιοντο ἀπολωλέναι, “the money which they thought had been lost,” P Oxy IV. 743°% (B.c. 2) ἐγὼ ὅλος διαπον[ο]ῦμαι εἰ Ἕλενος χαλκοῦς ἀπόλε[σ]εν, “1 am quite upset at Helenos’ loss of the money” (Edd.). In P Fay 111° (a.p. 95-6) we have it of destroying life: μένφομαί σαι μεγάλως ἀπολέσας X[v]piSia δύω ἀπὸ τοῦ ckvApod τῆς ὡδοῦ, “1 blame you greatly for the loss of two pigs owing to the fatigue of the journey” (Edd.). (Probably the writer meant ἀπολέσαντα, but the nom. will construe.) So in the dreams of Ptolemy, son of Glaucias, the helper of the Temple twins, P Par 50° (p.c. 160) Λέγω: Μηθαμῶς ἐργῇς (?) ἢ ἀπολέσῃ σου τὸν παῖδα’ κύριος οὐκ ἀπολύει (-- ἀπολλύει, presumably) τὸν αὑτοῦ παῖδα. Cf. P Petr III. 36 (a) verso*® δεόμενος μή pe ἀπολέσηι τῶι λιμῶι ἐν τῆι φυλακῆι : so Lk…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπολλύω (apolluō) — to destroy.

Included with: ἀπόλλῡμι

or ἀπολλύω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; the form is rejected by [Refs 5th c.BC+], imperfect ἀπώλλυν[Refs 5th c.BC+]future ἀπολέσω, Epic dialect ἀπολέσσω, Attic dialect ἀπολῶ, Ionic dialect ἀπολέω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἀπώλεσα, Epic dialect ἀπόλεσσα: perfect ἀπολώλεκα:—frequently in tmesi in Epic dialect; preposition postponed in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —stronger form of ὄλλυμι, destroy utterly, kill, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly of death in battle, ἀπώλεσε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν[Refs]; also of things, demolish, lay waste, ἀπώλεσεν Ἴλιον ἱρήν [Refs], etc.; generally, βίοτον δ᾽ ἀπὸ πάμπαν ὀλέσσει will waste my substance, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἵ μ᾽ ἀπωλλύτην sought to destroy me (imperfect sense), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in pregnant sense, ἐπεί με γᾶς ἐκ πατρίας ἀπώλεσε drove me ruined from.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς παρ᾽ ἡμέραν χάριτος τὰ μέγιστα τῆς…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπόλλυμι

apollumi

from 575 and the base of 3639; to destroy fully (reflexively, to

perish, or lose), literally or figuratively:--destroy, die, lose, mar,

perish.

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 3639

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπόλλυμι

v.

I destroy, lose, am perishing

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπόλλυμι apollymi 90x

to destroy utterly; to kill, Mt. 2:13; to bring to nought, make void, 1 Cor. 1:19; to lose, be deprived of, Mt. 10:42; to be destroyed, perish, Mt. 9:17; to be put to death, to die, Mt. 26:52; to be lost, to stray, Mt. 10:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπόλλυμι to destroy utterly, kill, slay, and of things, to destroy, demolish, waste, Hom., attic; in pregnant sense, γᾶς ἐκ πατρίας ἀπ. to drive me ruined from my fatherland, Eur.; λόγοις ἀπ. τινά Soph.:— to talk or bore one to death, Ar.

to lose utterly, πατέρα, νόστιμον ἦμαρ Hom.

Mid. ἀπόλλυμαι, fut. -ολοῦμαι, ionic -ολέομαι with part. ἀπολεύμενος: aor2 -ωλόμην: perf. -όλωλα: plup. ἀπολώλειν:— to perish utterly, die, Il.; c. acc. cogn., ἀπ. κακὸν μόρον, αἰπὺν ὄλεθρον Od.; to be undone, id. Od.; ἀπόλωλας you are done for, lost, ruined, Ar.; as an imprecation, κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην id. Ar.; in fut. part., ὦ κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολούμενε oh destined to a miserable end! i. e. oh villain, scoundrel! Ar.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PMI-1P — Verb · present · middle · indicative · first person · plural
present middle indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PMI-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
7%destroy
destroy7% · 7×may perish7% · 7×perishing6% · 6×destroyed6% · 6×will lose6% · 6×will perish5% · 5×having been lost4% · 4×perished3% · 3×other renderings53% · 50×

94 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 43 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 90 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πρόβατονa sheepἐνπαιδίονa little child,
αὐτός
ψυχήthe soul, life, ὅπωςhow, in order thστράτευμαan army
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔρχομαιI come, goπρόβατονa sheepζάωI live
μήNeg
οὐNegαὐτόςἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
σύοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaὕδωρwater
ἀπόλλυμιwe are perishing!90×
what comes after →
Article the
ψυχήthe soul, life, μισθόςwages, rewardγεωργόςa worker of the
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ὅςἀλλάbut, except
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεὑρίσκωI findπᾶςall, the whole,
ἀλλάbut, except
βάλλωI cast, throw, rἔχωI have, hold, poArticle the
εἷςone
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπόλλυμι · 90× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians 2 Peter Acts James Jude Romans 1 Peter
Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 219 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.25c. AD 40

κρύπτεται μὲν ἀεὶ καὶ φυλάττεται τὰ πάθη ἐν Σικίμοις — ὠμίασις δὲ ἑρμηνεύεται, ὁ γὰρ πονούμενος περὶ τὰς ἡδονὰς φυλακτικὸς τῶν ἡδονῶν ἐστιν —, ἀπόλλυται δὲ καὶ διαφθείρεται παρὰ τῷ σοφῷ, οὐ πρὸς βραχύν τινα χρόνον, ἀλλ’ „ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας“,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.59c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δὲ μὴ θηρίοις ἀλώμενος περιπέσῃ δεδιότος καὶ τοῦτον ἀπόληται τὸν τρόπον, ἐκέλευε μηδὲν ὑφορᾶσθαι σκυθρωπὸν ἀπὸ τοιαύτης αἰτίας, ἀλλʼ ἕνεκα τοῦ μηδὲν αὐτῷ ἐκ θηρίων γενέσθαι δεινὸν διὰ πάσης ἀδεῶς χωρεῖν γῆς·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.4c. AD 100

τοῦτο λέγει, ὅτι δικαίως ἀπολεῖται ἄνθρωπος, ὃς ἔχων ὁδοῦ δικαιοσύνης γνῶσιν ἑαυτὸν εἰς ὁδὸν σκότους ἀποσυνέχει.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Ryl. 2 141Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 37

βλάβους κατανεμήσεως διὰ τῶν ἑαυτῶν προβάτων ἔδωκάν μοι πληγὰς πλείους ἀναιδευόμενοι μὴ ἀποδοῦναι, καὶ ἀπώλεσα ἃς εἶχον ἀπὸ τιμῆς ὀπίου ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς μ καὶ ζώνην . διὸ ἀξιῶ ἀντιλήμψεως

P.Ryl. 2 144Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 38

τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα καὶ ἐνειλούμενός μοι ἀπώλεσα πινακίδα καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ξ, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἐτόλμησεν φθόνου μοι ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ

P.Laur. 3 72Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)?AD 118–AD 138

τακτα βαλ … αι … … … Εὐτυχῆς ἀπολέσθαι … … τοῦ προκειμένου ἐλαιῶνος … θ … … δεσμῶν ἑπτακοσίων

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
δὲde And G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέAnd2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
διεγερθεὶςegeirō having arisen up G1326 Verb · aorist · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To arouse, as in Luke 8:24 and Mark 4:39, means to wake or stir someone fully, either physically or mentally, like calming a storm or stirring one's mind to remember important things, as in 2 Peter 1:13
Tyndale gloss
to arouse
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διεγείρω means to fully wake or arouse, both literally and figuratively. It is built from the prefix δι- (meaning 'completely') and the root ἐγείρω (to awaken). The term covers a range of uses, from waking someone from sleep to stirring up emotions or thoughts. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like calming a storm (Mark 4:39) and encouraging believers (2 Peter 1:13).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** δι-εγείρω

[in LXX: Jth 1:4, Es 1:1, II Mac 7:21 15:10, III Mac 5:15 * ;]

to arouse completely, arouse as from rest or sleep: Lk 8:24; pass., Mk 4:39, Lk 8:24; of the sea, Jo 6:18. Metaph., of the mind: ἐν ὑπομνήσει, II Pe 1:13 3:1.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δι-εγείρω ; 1 aor. διήγειρα; Pass., impf. διηγειρόμην [but Tr WH (Tedd. 2, 7) διεγείρετο in Jn. vi. 18, cf. B. 34 (30); WH. App. p. 161]; 1 aor. ptep. διεγερθείς ; to wake up, awaken, arouse (from repose; differing from the simple eyeipw, which has a wider meaning); from sleep: τινά, Mk. iv. 38 [here T Tr WH eyeipovow]; Lk. viii. 24; pass., Lk. viii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; Mk. iv. 39; with the addition ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, Mt. i. 24 (LT Tr WH ἐγερθείς) ; from repose, quiet: in pass. of the sea, which begins to be agitated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the mind; stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1, as in 2 Mace. xv. 10, τινὰ τοῖς θυμοῖς. (Several times in the O.T. Apocr. [ef. W. 102 (97)]; Hippoer., [Aristot.], Hdian.; occasionally in Anthol.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διεγείρω Numb 144, we may quote P Lille I. 2811 (iii/B.c.) αὐτοῖς ἐδώκαμεν μεσίτην Δωρ[(Πὠν[α, ‘nous leur avons donne pour arbitre Dorion’’ (Edd.), P Flor I. 253 (a.p, 265) δίδομεν καὶ προσαγγέλλομεν τὸν ὑπογεγραμμένον εἰς δεσμοφυλακείαν : cf. 7b. 91° (ii/A.D.) ἐδόθην εἰς ἑϊ τέραν αὖ λιτουργία]ν, and P Oxy IX. 1195! (A.D. 135) ᾿Απολλωνίωι κριτῆι δοθέντι ὑπὸ Tletpwvlov Μαμερτείνου τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος. Similarly Deissmann (Z4£, p. 117) disposes of the “ Latinism ”’ in Lk 1258 by reference to a letter of B.C. 2 written in vulgar Greek, P Oxy IV. 7421, δὸς ἐργασία[ν, ‘give your attention to it,’’ and to the occurrence of the same phrase in the unpublished P Bremen 18 (c. A.D. 118), He also cites OG/S 441° (b.c. 81) φροντίζωσιν διδῶσίν τε ἐργασίαν, “may they take heed and give diligence’’ (but see Dittenberger’s note). Ilerwerden (Zev. s.v.) illustrates the elliptical use (e.g. Rev 2538)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διεγείρω (diegeirō) — to arouse.

διεγ-είρω,

wake up, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; stir up, arouse, [LXX]; excite, promote, αὔξησιν φυτοῦ [Refs]:—passive, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; to be raised up from a sick-bed, [Refs 1st c.AD+]aorist διέγρετο[Refs]

II. raise, τὸν αὐχένα [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, πύλας διεγειρομένας εἰς ὕψος πηχῶν ἑβδομήκοντα [LXX+5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

διεγείρω

diegeiro

from 1223 and 1453; to wake fully; i.e. arouse (literally or

figuratively):--arise, awake, raise, stir up.

see GREEK for 1223

see GREEK for 1453

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διεγείρω

v.

I wake out of sleep, I arouse

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διεγείρω diegeirō 6x

to arouse or awake thoroughly, Mt. 1:24; Mk. 4:38, 39; Lk. 8:24; pass. to be raised, excited, agitated, as a sea, Jn. 6:18; met. to stir up, arouse, animate, 2 Pet. 1:13; 3:1

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-APP-NSM — Verb · aorist · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
17%stir up
stir up17% · 1×i am stirring up17% · 1×having been awoken17% · 1×they awoke17% · 1×having arisen up17% · 1×agitated17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb67%adverbial33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δέbut, on the other ha
προσέρχομαιI come near, conArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
πνέωI blow
μέγας
σκήνωμαa dwelling
Article the
ὅς
ἐν
διεγείρωhaving arisen up
what comes after →
ἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide, adm
Article the
σύ
ἐν
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιεγείρω · 6× in the New Testament
2 Peter Luke John Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.82c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὲ ταύτην τὴν ὄψιν διεγερθεὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὕπνου καὶ τεταραγμένος ὢν καὶ τί ποτʼ εἴη τὸ φάντασμα παρʼ ἐμαυτῷ σκοπῶν καταφέρομαι πάλιν εἰς ὕπνον καὶ δεύτερον ὄναρ ὁρῶ πολὺ τοῦ προτέρου θαυμασιώτερον, ὅ με καὶ μᾶλλον ἐκφοβεῖ καὶ ταράττει.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἐπετίμησενepitimaō He rebuked G2008 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
30× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
It means to rebuke or warn someone, like in Matthew 8:26 where Jesus rebukes the storm.
Amplified meaning
warned, scolded
Tyndale gloss
to rebuke
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιτιμάω (i.e., *epitimao*) is built from the prefix ἐπι- and the root τιμάω. It covers a range of meanings including to honor, to raise in price, and primarily to censure or rebuke. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts where Jesus admonishes or rebukes, such as in Matthew 19:13 and Luke 23:40.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἐπιτιμάω, ἐλέγχω, αἰτία, ἔλεγχοΞ from a scan

OnE may ‘rebuke’ another without bringing the rebuked to a conviction of any fault on his part; and this, either because there was no fault, and the rebuke was therefore unneeded or unjust; or else because, though there was such fault, the rebuke was ineffectual to bring the offender to own it; and in this possibility of ‘rebuking’ for sin, without ‘ convincing’ of sin, lies the distinction between these two words. In ἐπιτιμᾶν lies simply the notion of rebuking ; which word can therefore be used of one unjustly checking or blaming another; in this sense Peter ‘began to rebuke’ his Lord (ἤρξατο ἐπιτιμᾶν, Matt. xvi. 22; cf. xix. 13; Luke xviii. 39):—or ineffectually, and without any profit to the person rebuked, who is not thereby brought to see his sin; as when the penitent robber ‘rebuked ’ (ἐπετίμα) his fellow malefactor (Luke xxiii. 40; cf. Mark ix. 25). But ἐλέγχειν is a much more…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-τιμάω, -ῶ

[in LXX for גָּעַר, Ge 37:10, Ps 9:5, Za 3:3(2); Si 11:7, al. ;]

to honour.

to raise in price

to mete out due measure;

to award;

to censure, rebuke, admonish: absol., II Ti 4:2; c. dat., Mt 8:26 17:13 19:13, Mk 4:39 8:32 10:13, Lk 4:39, 41 8:24 9:21, 42, 55 17:3 18:15 19:39, Ju 9; seq. ἵνα, Mt 12:16 16:20 20:31, Mk 3:12 8:30 10:48, Lk 18:39; seq. λέγων, λέγει, etc.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-τιμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπετίμα, 3 pers. plur. ἐπετίμων; 1 aor. ἐπετίμησα; Sept. for 11; in Grk. writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor: twa, Hdt. 6, 39. 2. to raise the price of: 6 σῖτος ἐπετιμήθη, Dem. 918, 22; al. 3. to adjudge, award, (fr. τιμή in the sense of merited penalty): τὴν δίκην, Hat. 4, 43. 4. to tax with fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so Thue., Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2; τινί, charge one with wrong, Lk. [ix. 55]; xvii. 3; xxiii. 40; to rebuke —in order to curb one’s ferocity or violence (hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to restrain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), Mt. Vili. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39,41; viii. 24; ix. 42; Jude 9 [where Rec. strangely ἐπιτιμῆσαι (1 aor. act. inf.) for -unoa (opt. 3 pers. sing.)]; or to keep one away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Mk. x. 13…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιτιμάω = ‘‘censure,” ‘‘ lay under a penalty,” as notably in Mk (see Allen ad Mk 839), may be illustrated from P Magd 245 B.C. 218) ἀγανακτήσαντος δέ pov Kal ἐπιτιμῶντος avt[ Ht, P Par 427 (B.C. 156) μεταπεμψάμενος οὖν αὐτὸν Kal τὸν φυλακίτην ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ, P Oxy X. 12959 (ii/iii A.D.) ἐὰν δὲ μέλλῃς οὕτω αὐτῷ ἐπιτιμᾶν, and Sy// 177° (B.C. 303) Strw]s, ἐάν τινες φαίνωνται μὴ τὰ βέλτιστα νομογραφοῦντες, ἀλλ᾽ [ἀνεπιτήδεια, αὐτοῖς] ἐπιτιμῶμεν καὶ ζημιῶμεν. In PSI IV. 3567 (B.C. 253-2) ἐπιτετίμηται is used of χόρτος that has been ‘‘augmented” in price. For ἐπιτιμή = “ penalty,” “fine,” see P Petr III. 20 versoii-5 (B.c. 246) τὰς ἐπιτιμὰς eis τὸ βασιλικ[ό]ν, and for the corresponding use of τὸ ἐπίτιμον, see P Gen I. 201° (ii/B.c.) προσαποτισάτω ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα, P Oxy II. 27528 (a.p. 66) (= Selections, p. 57) ἐπίτειμον δραχμὰς ἑκατόν, 7). X. 128249 (A.p. 83) τό τε βλάβος kal ἐπίτειμον…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιτιμάω (epitimaō) — to rebuke.

ἐπιτιμ-άω,

Ionic dialect and Delph. ἐπιτιμέω, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— lay a value upon: hence,

1. show honour to, τινά Hdt. [prev. cited]

2. raise in price, οἶνον ἐ. πολύ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὴν αἴτησιν ἐ. raise the demand, [Refs]:—passive, rise in price, of corn, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. of judges, lay a penalty on a person, τοῖς ἐξάρνοις ἐ. ταλάντου ἑκάστῳ variant in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but ἐ. τὴν ἀρχαίην δίκην make the original trial the ground of punishment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. object to one as blameable, τινί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. b with accusative of things only, censure, οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἐπιτιμῶ [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, τὸ..ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν ἐπιτιμώμενον [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιτιμάω

epitimao

from 1909 and 5091; to tax upon, i.e. censure or admonish; by

implication, forbid:--(straitly) charge, rebuke.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 5091

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιτιμάω

v.

I rebuke, chide, admonish, warn

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιτιμάω epitimaō 29x

pr. to set a value upon; to assess a penalty; to allege as a crimination; hence, to reprove, chide, censure, rebuke, reprimand, Mt. 19:13; Lk. 23:40; in NT to admonish strongly, enjoin strictly, Mt. 12:16; Lk. 17:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιτιμάω fut. ήσω to lay a value upon, Lat. aestimare: hence,

to shew honour to, τινά Hdt.

to raise in price:—Pass. to rise in price, Dem.

of judges, to lay a penalty on a person, Hdt.

c. acc. to censure, Dem.; also c. dat., id. Dem.: absol., Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
24%he rebuked
he rebuked24% · 7×rebuked24% · 7×rebuking17% · 5×do rebuke10% · 3×he warned7% · 2×rebuke7% · 2×would he rebuke3% · 1×he was rebuking3% · 1×other renderings3% · 1×

29 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb97%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
θεόςGod, a god
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
δέbut, on the otheArticle the
ἄρχωI begin
ΠέτροςPeterαὐτός
ὄχλοςa crowd
δέbut, on the otheἐπισυντρέχωI run together t
διεγείρωI wake out of sleep,
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἐπιτιμάωHe rebuked30×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἵναin order that, sArticle theλέγωI say, speak
Article the
ἄνεμοςthe windμαθητήςa learner, disciπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
ΠέτροςPeter
καίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
ἐάωI allow, permit,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπιτιμάω · 30× in the New Testament
Luke Mark Matthew 2 Timothy Jude
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Drunkenness 110c. AD 40

ὁ δὴ τούτοις ἐπιτιμῶν τὸν ἐπινίκιον ὕμνον ἐξάρχων ἐδείχθη.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 16.262c. AD 75–95

καὶ καταλαβὼν οὕτως ἔχοντα τὸ μὲν ἐπιτιμᾶν ἢ φάναι γενέσθαι τι προπετὲς αὐτῷ τελέως ἀνοίκειον εἰς τὸν καιρὸν ἡγήσατο·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 2nd c. AD undated 2nd c. BC
BGU 4 1185Herakleopolites62 BC–61 BC

ἀγνοημάτων ἁμαρτημάτων καταγνωσμάτων … ων σκεπεστικῶν αἰτιῶν πασῶν ἐπιγραφῶν ζημιῶν παραλογειῶν ἐπιτίμων προστίμων … τοῦ ιθ ἔτους ὀφειλημάτων βασιλικῶν πάντων … ουλ … τισὶν τούτων προσηγμένοις

BGU 8 1844Herakleopolites51 BC–50 BC

βεβαιώσαντες καὶ ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ διακωλύσειν μήτʼ ἐνκαλέσειν τρόπωι ὡιτινιοῦν ὁρισθέντων κατὰ τοῦ παραβαίνοντος ἐπιτίμων, … … σθος ἀπηλπικὼς τὸ καλῶς ἔχον κατὰ τὴν τοῦ ὁμολογίου συγγραφὴν διακωλύσειν τρόποις

P.Fam.Tebt. 17Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 133

τῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ προγεγραμμένου μου πατρὸς ἀπολελειμμένων πρὸς τὸ μὴ διοχλεῖσθαί με ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐπιτίμων. διευτύχει. Ἡρακλείδης ὁ καὶ Οὐαλέριoς Ἡρακλείδου Μάρωνος Ματίδιος ὁ καὶ Καλλιτέκνειος ἐπιδέδωκα καθὼς πρόκειται.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
τῷho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἀνέμῳanemos wind G417 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Wind is the literal meaning, but it can also imply the four directions of the earth, as in Matthew 24:31 and Revelation 7:1. It's used to describe a natural phenomenon or a metaphor for change.
Amplified meaning
air, breath
Tyndale gloss
wind
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄνεμος (anemos) means 'wind' and is used in various contexts, including literal and metaphorical senses. It can refer to the four cardinal winds or directions, as well as symbolize instability in teaching (Eph 4:14). The term appears frequently in the New Testament, notably in passages describing storms and winds, such as Matthew 14:24 and Mark 4:39. Lexicons note its use in both classical and biblical literature.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — πνοή, πνεῦμα, ἄνεμος, θύελλα from a scan

From the words into comparison with which πνεῦμα is here brought, it will be evident that it is proposed to deal with it in its natural and earthly, not in its supernatural and heavenly, meaning. Only I will observe, that on the relations between πνοή and πνεῦμα in this its higher sense there is a discussion in Augustine, De Civ. Dei, xiii. 22; cf. De Anim. et huj. Orig. i. 14, 19. The first three words of this group, as they designate not things heavenly but things earthly, differ from one another exactly as, according to Seneca, do in the Latin ‘aér,’ ‘spiritus,’ ‘ ventus’ (Nat. Qu. v. 13) : ‘Spiritum a vento motus' separat; vehementior enim spiritus ventus est; invicem spiritus leviter fluens aer.’ Πνοή and πνεῦμα occur not seldom together, as at Isai. xlii. 5; lvii. 16; πνοή conveying the impression of a lighter, gentler, motion of the air than πνεῦμα, as ‘aura’ than ‘ventus.’…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄνεμος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX for רוּחַ;]

wind: Mt 11:7 14:24, 30, 32, Mk 4:37, 39, 41 6:48, 51, Lk 7:24 8:23, 24, Jo 6:13, Ac 27:7, 14, 15, Ja 3:4, Re 6:13 7:1; pl., Mt 7:25, 27 8:26, 27, Lk 8:25, Ac 27:4, Ju 12; οἱ τέσσαρες ἄ. τῆς γῆς, Re 7:1; hence the four quarters of the heavens (v. Deiss., BS, 248; MM, VGT, s.v.), Mt 24:31, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄνεμος, -ov, 6, (ἄω, ἄημι to breathe, blow, [but etymologists connect ἄω with Skr. vd, Grk. ἀήρ, Lat. ventus, Eng. wind, and ἄνεμος with Skr. an to breathe, etc. ; cf. Curtius §§ 419, 587; Vanitek p. 28]), [fr. Hom. down], wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [ef. (Trench § Ixxiii.) πνεῦμα, 1 fin.]: Mt. xi. 7; xiv. 24; Jas. iii. 4, etc.; of a very strong and tempestuous wind: Mt. vii. 25; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. viii. 24, ete. οἱ τέσσαρες ἄνεμοι, the four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)), τῆς γῆς, Rev. vii. 1; hence the four quarters of the heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow): Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24). Metaph. ἄνεμος τῆς διδασκαλίας, variability and emptiness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄνεμος. To Deissmann’s example (2S, p. 248) CPR 1158 (ii/a.p.) γείτο]νες ἐκ τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, where the phrase clearly refers to the four cardinal points as in Zech 11%, Mt 2491, Mk 1337, we may add P Flor I. 50!4 (a.p. 268) ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων. The same use of ἄνεμος is implied in P Flor I. 20'8 (A.D. 127) ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν 6 “Cpos αἱρῆται ἀνέμου : Vitelli compares Catullus xxvi, where the poet says his bungalow is ‘“exposed ” (offoszta) not to S. or W. wind, N. or E., but to a mortgage of £63. In P Oxy I. 100! (a.p. 133) a declaration regarding the sale of land, we find ὧν ἡ τοποθεσία kal TO κατ᾽ ἄνεμον διὰ τῆς καταγραφῆς δεδήλωται, where the editors understand by τὸ κατ᾽ ἄνεμον the boundaries on the four sides. For the ordinary sense we need quote nothing, unless we may note the combination in Wiinsch AF 45 (p. 15—iii/A.D.) τὸν θεὸν τῶν ἀνέμων καὶ πνευμάτων “Λαιλαμ. (It is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄνεμος (anemos) — wind.

ἄνεμος [ᾰ], ὁ,

wind, πέτετο πνοιῇ ἀνέμοιο[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀνέμου κατιόντος μεγάλου a gale having come on, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνέμου ἐξαίφνης ἀσελγοῦς γενομένου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄνεμος κατὰ βορέαν ἑστηκώς the wind being set in the north, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνέμοις φέρεσθαι παραδιδόναι τι cast a thing to the winds, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ἄνεμον στῆναι stand to leeward, [Refs 4th c.BC+] 'unstable as the wind', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φέρειν τιν᾽ ἄρας (sic l.) ἄ. a very wind to carry off, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀνέμους θηρᾶν ἐν δικτύοις try to catch the wind, and ἀνέμῳ διαλέγεσθαι talk to the wind, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄνεμος

anemos

from the base of 109; wind; (plural) by implication, (the four)

quarters (of the earth):--wind.

see GREEK for 109

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄνεμος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

the wind

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἄνεμος anemos 31x

the wind; met. a wind of shifting doctrine, Eph. 4:14

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄνεμος Root ΑΝ, cf. ἄημι wind, Hom., etc.; ἀνέμου κατιόντος a squall having come on, Thuc.; ἄν. κατὰ βορέαν ἑστηκώς the wind being settled in the north, id. Thuc.; ἀνέμοις φέρεσθαι παραδοῦναί τι to cast a thing to the winds, Lat. ventis tradere, Eur.:—Hom. and Hes. mention only four winds, Boreas, Eurus, Notus (or Argestes), Zephyrus; Arist. gives twelve, which served as points of the compass.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wind (anemos:

1. Causes:

Unequal distribution of heat in the atmosphere causes currents of air or wind. The heated air rises and the air from around rushes in. The direction from which a current comes determines its name, as west wind coming from the West but blowing toward the East. When two currents of air of different directions meet, a spiral motion sometimes results.

See WHIRLWIND.

2. West Wind:

In Palestine the west wind is the most common. It comes from the sea and carries the moisture which condenses to form clouds, as it is turned upward by the mountains, to the cooler layers of the atmosphere. If the temperature reached is cool enough the cloud condenses and rain falls. Elijah looked toward the West for the "small cloud," and soon "the heavens grew black with clouds and wind" (1Ki 18:44 f). "When ye see a cloud rising in the…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Blasting 2Ki 19:7,35

→ East

Hot and blasting in Egypt Ge 41:6

In the valley of the Euphrates River Eze 19:12

In Canaan Ho 13:15; Lu 12:55

At the city of Nineveh Jon 4:8

Tempestuous in the land of Uz Job 27:21

→ West

Took away the plague of locusts from the land of Egypt Ex 10:19

→ North

Free from humidity in Canaan Pr 25:23

→ South

Soothing Job 37:17

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
61%wind
wind61% · 19×winds35% · 11×a wind3% · 1×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject52%adverbial26%object19%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,καίand, even, also,κοπάζωI cease, drop
ὑπό
κάλαμοςa reed, reed-penκαίand, even, also,ἄνυδροςwithout water, d
τέσσαρεςfour
Article the
μέγας
λαῖλαψa sudden storm,
λαῖλαψa sudden storm, squa
καταβαίνωI go down, come
ἄνεμοςwind31×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπροσπίπτωI fall down befoπροσκόπτωI stumble
σαλεύωI shake, excite
ἀπό
ἄκρονthe end, extremi
μέγας
πνέωI blowσείωI shake
Article the
διδασκαλίαinstruction, teaγῆthe earth, soil,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄνεμος · 31× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Acts Luke Revelation Ephesians James John Jude
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 39 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 38c. AD 40

καὶ τοῦ συμβαίνοντος ἡ μηδὲν αἰτία θάλαττα τὴν πρόφασιν ἴσχει, φανερῶς ταῖς ἀνέσεσι καὶ σφοδρότησι τῶν ἀνέμων ἢ γαληνιάζουσα ἢ κυμαίνουσα".

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.118c. AD 75–95

οἱ δὲ θεοὶ ἀνέμους ἐπιπέμψαντες ἀνέτρεψαν τὸν πύργον καὶ ἰδίαν ἑκάστῳ φωνὴν ἔδωκαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.7c. AD 100

οὐχ οὕτως οἱ ἀσεβεῖς, οὐχ οὕτως, ἀλλ̓ ἢ ὡς ὁ χνοῦς, ὃν ἐκρίπτει ὁ ἄνεμος ἀπὸ προσώπου τῆς γῆς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Flor. 1 20Theadelphia (ArsinoitesAD 127

ἐδάφεσι ἄρουραν μίαν ἐκ σχοινουργίας ἀπὸ ἀρουρῶν πέντε ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν ὁ Ὧρος αἱρῆται ἀνέμου εἰς ἀρακοσπέρμου σπορὰν σὺν τῷ φυησομένωι σινάπι τοῦ Ὥρου χορηγοῦντος σπέρματα καὶ σπορέα καὶ

P.Oxy. 1 100OxyrhynchosAD 133

καὶ Ἰουδαικῆς λοιπῶν ψιλῶν τόπων βίκους τέσσαρας , ὧν ἡ τοποθεσία καὶ τὸ κατʼ ἄνεμον διὰ τῆς καταγραφῆς δεδήλωται· εἶναί τε ἐμοῦ καὶ μήτε ὑποκεῖσθαι μηδὲ ἑτέροις ἐξηλλοτριῶσθαι κατὰ

ἔτους Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου, ἔστι δέ· μητροπόλεως· συκάμινοι γ καταπεπτωκυῖαι … ἀπὸ βίας ἀνέμου ἐπὶ ἠθετημένου χώματος ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως, ὧν μέτρα· μιᾶς μὲν μήκους πήχεις δ,

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
τῷho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
κλύδωνιkludōn raging G2830 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Waves of the sea, like in Luke 8:24. It can also mean a surge or a raging wave, as in James 1:6.
Amplified meaning
turbulent, violent
Tyndale gloss
waves
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κλύδων (*kludon*) means a wave or billow, derived from the verb κλύζω (to wash over). It covers both literal and metaphorical uses, such as a surge of the sea or a 'sea of troubles.' In the New Testament, it appears in Luke 8:24 and James 1:6, where it conveys the idea of violent agitation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κλύδων, -ωνος, ὁ

(κλύζω, of the sea, to wash over),

[in LXX: Jh 1:4, 12 (סער), al.;]

a billow, surge: Lk 8:24, Ja 1:6.†

SYN.: κῦμα, a wave.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κλύδων, -wvos, 6, (κλύζω, to wash against); fr. Hom. down; a dashing or surging wave, a surge, a violent agitation of the sea: τοῦ ὕδατος, Lk. viii. 24; τῆς θαλάσσης, Jas. i. 6 (Jon. i. 4, 12; Sap. xiv. 5).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κλύδων. Hort (on Jas 15) has pointed out that the proper sense of κλύδων is always ‘“‘rough water” rather than ‘‘ wave”: cf. Lk 835, τ Macc 614, and to the passages from profane sources cited by Armitage Robinson on Eph 41} add M. Anton. xii. 14. The plur. = “‘waves’’ is found in Vett. Val. p. 3447° with reference to a ship exposed τοῖς. . μυρίοις κλύδωσιν.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κλύδων (kludōn) — waves.

κλύδων [ῠ], ωνος, ὁ,

wave, billow, and collectively, surf, rough water, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πελάγιος, θαλάσσιος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. in Medicine texts, splashing in the stomach and chest, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of sound heard in pleurisy, [Refs]; ἢν κ. ὑγρῶν ἀναπνέῃ ἐς τὰς διαπνοάς flood of humours, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ofinternal water in dropsy, [Refs]

II. metaphorically, κ. κακῶν sea of troubles, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ἔφιππος flood of chariots, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κλύδων

kludon

from kluzo (to billow or dash over); a surge of the sea (literally or

figuratively):--raging, wave.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κλύδων, ῶνος, ὁ

n.m.

rough water

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κλύδων klydōn 2x

a wave, billow, surge, Lk. 8:24; Jas. 1:6*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κλύδων κλύ^δων, ωνος, κλύζω a wave, billow, and collectively surf Od., Trag.

metaph., κλ. κακῶν a sea of troubles, Aesch.; κλ. ξυμφορᾶς Soph.; κλ. ἔφιππος a flood of horsemen, id. Soph., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%a wave
a wave50% · 1×raging50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,
ἔοικαI am like, resemble
διακρίνωI distinguish, d
κλύδωνraging
what comes after →
Article the
ὕδωρwater
θάλασσαthe sea, lake
ἀνεμίζωI am blown with

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκλύδων · 2× in the New Testament
James Luke
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 4 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 63c. AD 40

καὶ τὰ μὲν εὐδίᾳ καὶ γαλήνῃ σφριγᾷ, τὰ δὲ κλύδωνι καὶ κυματώσει·

JosephusThe Jewish War 3.423c. AD 75–95

καὶ τὰς μὲν ἀλλήλαις τῶν νεῶν αὐτόθι συνήραξεν, τὰς δὲ πρὸς ταῖς πέτραις, πολλὰς δὲ πρὸς ἀντίον κῦμα βιαζομένας εἰς τὸ πέλαγος, τόν τε γὰρ αἰγιαλὸν ὄντα πετρώδη καὶ τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῦ πολεμίους ἐδεδοίκεσαν, μετέωρος ὑπεραρθεὶς ὁ κλύδων ἐβάπτιζεν.

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ὕδατος.hudōr, hudatos water. G5204 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
79× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Water refers to literal or figurative water, as seen in Matthew 3:16 and John 4:7. It can also be used in a spiritual sense, such as in baptism or as a symbol of life.
Tyndale gloss
water
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὕδωρ (lemma: hudor) means 'water' and is used in various contexts, including literal and metaphorical senses. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in relation to baptism, spiritual refreshment, and contrasts with elements like wine and blood. The word can also refer to different types of water, such as rainwater or water from wells and rivers.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὕδωρ

gen., ὕδατος, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for מַיִם ;]

water: Mt 3:16, Mk 1:10, Lk 7:44, Jo 4:7, Ja 3:12, Re 8:10, al.; pl., Mt 14:28, 29, Jo 3:23, Re 1:15, al.; βαπτίζειν (ἐν) ὕδατι, Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Jo 1:26, al.; τ. λουτρὸν τοῦ ὕ., Eph 5:26; opp. to οἴνος, Jo 2:9 4:46; αἷμα, Jo 19:34, He 9:19, I Jo 5:6, 8,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὕδωρ, (ὕω [but ef. Curtius 8. 300]), gen. ὕδατος, τό, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 0°, water: of the water in rivers, Mt. iii.16; Rev. xvi. 12; in wells, Jn.iv. 7; in fountains, Jas. iii. 12; Rev. viii. 10; xvi. 4; in pools, Jn. v. 3 56. [RL}, 7; of the water of the deluge, 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 6 [W. 604 sq. (562)]; of water in any of earth’s repositories, Rev. viii. 10 sq.; xi.6; 6 ἄγγελος τῶν ὑδάτων, Rey. xvi. 5; of water as a primary element, out of and through which the world that was before the deluge arose and was compacted, 2 Pet. iii. 5. plur. τὰ ὕδατα, of the waves of the Lake of Galilee, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; (so also the sing. τὸ ὕδωρ in Lk. viii. 25); of the waves of er vlog the sea, Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2, (on both these pass. see φωνή, 1); πολλὰ ὕδατα, many springs or fountains, Jn. iii. 23 ; fig. used of many peoples, Rev. xvii. 1, as the seer himseif explains it in vs. 15, ef.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὕδωρ. A few miscellaneous exx. should serve to illustrate this common word—P Cairo Zen III. 594671 (iii/B.c.) τὸ ὕδωρ ἀφίομεν, ‘we release the water,” PSI IV. 406%° (iii/B.c.) χαλκῖα δύο ὕδατος, 75. 429% (iii/B.c.) τὸ ὕδωρ ἐκ τῆς διώρυγος, P Bilabel 4915 (beg. ii/B.c.) ὥλκασσον (‘draw ἢ) δὲ τὴν τρ[οφὴν ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, P Fay 110! (A.D. 94) το[ὺ]ς é[Aat]avas τὸ δεύτερον [ὕ]δω[ρ] λουϊσ]άτωσαν, “have the olive-yards washed over a second time” (Edd.), BGU I. 2469 (ii/iii ap.) ade (2. ἁλὶ) καὶ ἄρτῳ Kal ὕδατι, P Oxy II. 2341} τ κρόκον ὕδωρ ἐπιστάξας, ‘‘drop on saffron water” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 143}? (iv/A.D.) διὰ τὴν ἀφορμὴν τοῦ ὕδατος, ‘“ because of the flow of water.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὕδωρ (hudōr, hudatos) — water.

ὕδωρ [ῠ,

see near the end], τό, genitive ὕδατος: an Epic dialect dative ὕδει in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later nominative ὕδος [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect οὕδωρ probably in [Refs]:—water, of any kind, but in [Refs 8th c.BC+] rarely of seawater without an epithet, ἄνεμός τε καὶ ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of rivers, ὕ. Αἰσήποιο, Στυγός, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Lyric poetry and Trag., ὕ, Ἀσώπιον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently in plural (but only once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the waters of Cephisus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: spring-water, drinking-water, οἶνον ἔμισγον καὶ ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὕ. πίνων a water-drinker, [Refs 5th c.BC+] water for washing the hands, see at {χεί; φέρτε χερσὶν ὕ}. [Refs 8th c.BC+] —a curse was invoked upon those who refused fire (i.e. the right to borrow burning embers) or water or to direct a traveller on his way, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅταν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὕδωρ

hudor

hudatos hoo'-dat-os, etc.

from the base of 5205; water (as if rainy) literally or

figuratively:--water.

see GREEK for 5205

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό

n.n.

water

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὕδωρ hydōr 76x

water, Mt. 3:11, 16; 14:28, 29; 17:15; Jn. 5:3, 4, 7; watery fluid, Jn. 19:34; ὕδωρ ζῶν, living water, fresh flowing water, Jn. 4:11; met. of spiritual refreshment, Jn. 4:10; 7:38

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὕδωρ epic also ὕδει as if from ὕδος water, of any kind, but in Hom. rarely of sea-water (which he calls ἁλμυρὸν ὕδωρ); — also in pl., ὕδατ᾽ αἰενάοντα Od.; ὕδατα Καφίσια the waters of Cephisos, Pind.:— ὕδωρ κατὰ χειρός water for washing the hands, Ar.; ὕ. ἐπὶ χεῖρας ἔχευαν Hom.—Proverbs., γράφειν τι εἰς ὕδωρ of anything untrustworthy, Soph.; ἐν ὕδατι γρ. Plat.; ὅταν τὸ ὕδωρ πνίγῃ, τί δεῖ ἐπιπίνειν; if water chokes, what more can be done? of a desperate case, Arist.

rain-water, rain, Il., Hdt., attic;—more definitely, ὕδωρ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ Thuc., etc.; Ζεὺς ὕδωρ ὕει, ὁ θεὸς ὕδωρ ποιεῖ Ar.

for the phrase ἐν ὕδατι βρέχεσθαι, Hdt., v. βρέχω.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wo'-ter (mayim; hudor):

(1) The Greek philosophers believed water to be the original substance and that all things were made from it. The Koran states, "From water we have made all things." In the story of the creation (Ge 1:2) water plays an elemental part.

(2) Because of the scarcity of water in Palestine it is especially appreciated by the people there. They love to go and sit by a stream of running water. Men long for a taste of the water of their native village (1Ch 11:17). A town or village is known throughout the country for the quality of its water, which is described by many adjectives, such as "light," "heavy," etc.

(3) The rainfall is the only source of supply of water for Palestine. The moisture is carried up from the sea in clouds and falls on the hills as rain or snow.…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See CISTERN and WELLS.

In Isa 35:7, the Hebrew word for "parched ground" that shall become a pool of water, is the same with the Arabic term for the mirage, a peculiar optical illusion by which travelers in hot and dry deserts think they see broad lakes and flowing waters; they seem to discern the very ripple of the waves, and the swaying of tail trees on the margin in the cool breeze; green hills and houses and city ramparts rise before the astonished sight, recede as the traveler advances, and at length melt away in the hot haze. Not so the blessings of the gospel; they are no alluring mockery, but real waters of everlasting life, Isa 55:1 Joh 4:14 Re 22:1. Compare

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Creation of Ps 148:4,5

→ Covered the whole earth Ge 1:9

→ Daily allowance of Eze 4:11

→ City waterworks 2Ki 20:20

→ Vision of, by Ezekiel Eze 47:1-5

→ Of separation Nu 19:2-22

→ Libation of 1Sa 7:6

→ Irrigation with

See IRRIGATION

→ Miraculously supplied

To the Israelites Ex 17:1,6; Nu 20:11

To Samson Jud 15:19

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- One of the elements of the world

Ge 1:2

- GOD ORIGINALLY

. Created the firmament to divide

Ge 1:6,7

. Collected into one place

Ge 1:9

. Created fowls and fishes, &c from

Ge 1:20,21

- Necessary to vegetation

Ge 2:5,6; Job 14:9; Isa 1:30

- Some plants particularly require

Job 8:11

- Necessary to the comfort and happiness of man

Isa 41:17; Zec 9:11

- COLLECTED IN

. Springs

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%water
water79% · 63×waters21% · 17×

80 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial52%object27%subject17%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 79 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐκἐνἐπί
ἐν
βαπτίζωI dip, submerge,ἐγώ
πηγήa fountain, spring,
αὐτόςζωήlifeκαίand, even, also,
διά
διασῴζωI save, bring saκαίand, even, also,ἔρχομαιI come, go
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
ὡςas, like as, how
ὕδωρwater.79×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁράωI see, look uponἔρχομαιI come, goπαύωI cause to cease
πολύςmuch, many, often
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist
Article the
ζάωI liveοὖνtherefore, thenτέDisj
εἰς
μετάνοιαrepentance, a chArticle theἄψινθοςwormwood
ὅς
ἐγώδίδωμιI offer, giveὁράωI see, look upon

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὕδωρ · 79× in the New Testament
John Revelation Acts Matthew Luke Mark 1 John 2 Peter Hebrews 1 Peter Ephesians James
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 373 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.70c. AD 75–95

ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ηὑρημένα μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι, προειρηκότος ἀφανισμὸν Ἀδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι τὸν μὲν κατʼ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς τὸν ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος, στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνθου…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.1c. AD 100

Ζητήσωμεν δέ, εἰ ἐμέλησεν τῷ κυρίῳ προφανερῶσαι περὶ τοῦ ὕδατος καὶ περὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Arsinoites276 BC–227 BC

τε μελίσσεια ἀπολέσθαι καὶ τὸν φόρον διαπεσεῖν. καὶ νῦν διαμαρτύρονται οἱ γεωργοὶ διότι, τὸ ὕδωρ ἀφίεμεν καὶ τὰ ξύλα ἐμπυρίζομεν. ἐὰν οὖν μὴ ἄρητε αὐτά, ἀπολεῖτε. δεόμεθα οὖν σου,

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59703276 BC–227 BC

νεῖ ἡμιωβέλιον γάλα ἡμιωβέλιον … … εὔζωμον … … ὀβολὸς βαλανεῖ … … ἡμιωβέλιον ὕδωρ ταῖς παιδίσκαις … … ἄρτους διώβολον γάλα ἡμιωβέλιον … … τωνι ὀβολὸς σίναπυ χαλκοῖ

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59704276 BC–227 BC

ἄρακοι ὀβολὸν γίνεται δραχμὴ α ἡμιωβέλιον ιε Ἀπολλωνίωι ῥαφάνια ὀβολοῦ τέταρτον κράμβη ὀβολοῦ τέταρτον ὕδωρ θερμὸν χαλκοῦς 1 βαλανεῖ ὀβολοῦ τέταρτον Σπίνθηρι ὀβολοὺς δ 𐅵 βαλανεῖ Ζήνωνος ὀβολοῦ τέταρτον

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἐπαύσαντο,pauō they ceased, G3973 Verb · aorist · middle · indicative · third person · plural
15× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To cease means to stop or quit something, as seen in Luke 8:24 and 1 Corinthians 13:8. This verb can be used to describe the end of an action or a habit.
Amplified meaning
ceased, stopped
Tyndale gloss
to cease
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παύω, transliterated as pauō, means to cease or stop, often used in both active and middle forms. It can refer to making something or someone come to an end, or simply to leave off an action. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like 1 Peter 3:10 and Luke 8:24, where it conveys the idea of cessation or restraint.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παύω,

[in LXX for כּלה pi., etc.;]

to make to cease, restrain, hinder: c. acc. rei, seq. ἀπό, I Pe 3:10(LXX). Mid., to cease, leave off: Lk 8:24 11:1, Ac 20:1, I Co 13:8; c. ptcp., Lk 5:4, Ac 5:42 6:13 13:10 20:31 21:32, Eph 1:16, Col 1:9, He 10:2; c. gen., ἀμαρτίας, I Pe 4:1 (WH, mg., R, txt.); c. dat., I…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παύω: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. παυσάτω (1 Pet. iii. 10); Mid., pres. παύομαι; impf. ἐπαυόμην; fut. παύσομαι (see dvaravw and éravarav [and on the forms παῆναι ete. ef. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p. xviii. note, also his ed. of the ‘Teaching’ 4, 2 note (p. 97)]); pf. πέπαυμαι; 1 aor. ἐπαυσάμην ; fr. Hom. down; to make to cease or desist: τὶ or τινὰ ἀπό τινος, to restrain [A. V. refrain] a thing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10, fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; cf. W. § 30, 6; [(cf. 326 (305)); B. § 132, 5]. Mid. Sept. for 51m, nba, naw, ste. to cease, leave off, [cf. W. 258 (238)]: Lk. viii. 24; Acts xx. 1; 1 Co. xiii. 8; the action or state desisted from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptep. (cf. Matthiae § 551 d.; Passows. v. Il. 3; [L. and S. I. 4]; W. § 45,4; [B.§ 144, 15]): ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν, Lk. v. 4 (Gen. xviii. 33; Num. xvi. 31; Deut. xx.9)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παύω. For the mid. = ‘‘ cease,’’ as with one exception (1 Pet 3°) in the NT, cf. P Hib I. 5910 (c. B.c. 245) εἰ μὴ παύσει κ[αἸκοποῶν ἐν τῆι Kwpn[t] μεταμελή[σ]ει σοι, “if you do not cease your malpractices in the village, you will be sorry for it,’’ P Oxy VIII. 1121!° (a.p. 295) οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην τὰ πρέποντα γείνεσθαι ὑπὸ τέκνων γονεῦσι ἀναπληροῦσα, “1 was assiduous in performing what is owing from children to parents” (Ed.), and P Lond 417! (c. a.p. 346) (= II. p- 299, Sr/ections, p. 124) καὶ πάλειν, ἂμ μὴ παύσεται (1 ἐὰν μὴ παύσηται), ἔρχεται εἰς τὰς χεῖράς σου ἄλλω ἅβαξ (Δ ἄλλο ἅπαξ), ‘and again, if he does not desist, he will come into your hands still another time.’’ In an illiterate letter from parents to their son giving news regarding their health, P Oxy X. 1299°f (iv/a.D.), they write—émta ἀπὸ Tov νέω ἔτους πολλὰ ἐνοσοῦμεν, ἀλλὰ εὐχαριστῶ[μ]εν τῷ θεῷ ὅτι ἐπαυμένην (/. πεπαυμένοι)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παύω (pauō) — to cease.

παύω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect imperfect παύεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future παύσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive παυσέμεν (κατα-) [Refs]aorist ἔπαυσα [Refs], Epic dialect παῦσα [Refs]: perfect πέπαυκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle and passive, Ionic dialect imperfect παυέσκετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future παύσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πεπαύσομαι only [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παυσθήσομαι (variant παυθ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later παήσομαι (ἀνα-) [NT]: aorist ἐπαυσάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπαύθην, Epic dialect παύθην, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.; ἐπαύσθην [Refs 5th c.BC+] H.: perfect πέπαυμαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. causal, make to end,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παύω

pauo

a primary verb ("pause"); to stop (transitively or intransitively),

i.e. restrain, quit, desist, come to an end:--cease, leave, refrain.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παύω

v.

I cause to cease

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παύω pauō 15x

to cause to pause or cease, restrain, prohibit, 1 Pet. 3:10; mid. perf. πέπαυται, to cease, stop, leave off, desist, refrain, 1 Pet. 4:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παύω Causal, to make to cease:

of persons, to bring to an end, check, make an end of (by death), Hom., etc.:—Pass. and Mid. to take one's rest, rest, cease, have done, Il.:—also of things, to make an end of, stop, abate, id. Il., etc.; π. τόξον to let one's bow rest, Od.; π. τὸν νόμον to annul it, Eur.; π. τυραννίδα to put it down, Dem.

c. acc. pers. et gen. rei, to make to rest, stop, hinder, keep back from a thing, π. Ἕκτορα μάχης, etc., Hom., etc.: —π. τινὰ τῆς βασιλείας to depose one from being king, Hdt., etc.:—Pass. and Mid. to leave off from, rest or cease from, πολέμου Hom., etc.; τῆς μάχης Hdt., etc.; ἐκ τρόχων πεπαυμένοι at rest from play, Eur.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AMI-3P — Verb · aorist · middle · indicative · third person · plural
aorist middle indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AMI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
7%they were ceasing
they were ceasing7% · 1×does stop7% · 1×will you cease7% · 1×ceasing7% · 1×i ceased7% · 1×they stopped7% · 1×they will cease7% · 1×do cease7% · 1×other renderings47% · 7×

15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 15 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
οἶκοςa house, househoοὗτοςδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes
δέbut, on the other ha
ὡςas, like as, how
καίand, even, also, nam
ὕδωρwater
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
προσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
Article the
δέbut, on the othe
παύωthey ceased,15×
what comes after →
λαλέωI speak, say
λέγωI say, speakῥῆμαa thing spoken
Article the
θόρυβοςconfused noise, γλῶσσαthe tongue, a la
καίand, even, also, nam
γίνομαιI come into bein
λέγωI say, speak
τὶς
διδάσκωI teach
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαύω · 15× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians Hebrews
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 51 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.5c. AD 40

παύεται γὰρ οὐδέποτε ποιῶν ὁ θεός, ἀλλ’ ὥσπερ ἴδιον τὸ καίειν πυρὸς καὶ χιόνος τὸ ψύχειν, οὕτως καὶ θεοῦ τὸ ποιεῖν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.34c. AD 75–95

τῶν δὲ τὸ πραχθὲν αὐτῷ φρασάντων παύεται τοῦ πένθους Ῥουβῆλος.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.3.2c. AD 140

ἀλλ̓ οὐ παύσῃ αἰτούμενος ἀποκαλύψεις: ἀναιδὴς γὰρ εἶ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Würzb. 1 21Koptos (?)AD 101–AD 200

πεποίηκας εἰς τὸ ἐμὲ πεῖσαι καὶ εὐχαριστῶ σοι πολλά· ἀφʼ ἧς γεγράφηκας αὐτῷ τότε πέπαυται ταῦτα ὢν μετʼ ἐμοῦ. ἐρωτῶ σε οὖν, κύριέ μου πάτερ, καὶ παρακαλῶ, ἐὰν θέλῃς,

P.Oxy. Hels. 23MemphisAD 213

ὄντι ἐπὶ τοῦ α … … δρόμου ἐξαγορευτικοῦ Ἀφροδίτης θεᾶς μεγίστης, οἰόμενος ὅτι δύναται παύσασθαι, ὃς δὲ τῇ αὐτῇ ἀπονοίᾳ ἐχρήσατο καὶ πολλά μοι ἐπαγγέλλει. εὐλαβούμενος οὖν μὴ καὶ

Aegyptus 15 (1935), p. 222-223 no. 8Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 201–AD 300

Τρύφωνι πατρὶ Ἀμμώνιος χαίρειν. οὐ παύομαι διʼ ὄχλου σοι γεινόμενος περὶ τῆς ἐργασίας τῶν πραγμάτων ἵνα μὴ ὕστερον ἐν ἀμελείᾳ

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
ἐγένετοginomai there was G1096 Verb · second aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
668× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A versatile word meaning to be, become, or come into being, used in John 1:15 and 1 Corinthians 15:37.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

γίνομαι (ginomai) is a versatile Greek verb meaning to come into being, be born, or arise. It covers a wide range of uses, from the creation of things to events occurring. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as birth (e.g., Romans 1:3), occurrences in nature (e.g., John 12:29), and actions being performed (e.g., Matthew 21:42). It can also express the idea of becoming or changing states.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γίνομαι, Ion. and κοινή for Att. γίγν- (M. Pr., 47; Bl., §6, 8 Mayser, 166 f.),

[in LXX chiefly for היה ;]

of persons, things occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on: Jo 1:15 8:58, I Co 15:37; a first appearance in public, Mk 1:4, Jo 1:6, al.; seq. ἐκ (of birth), Ro 1:3, Ga 4:4; διά, Jo 1:3; βροντή, Jo 12:29; σεισμός, Re 6:12; γογγυσμός, Ac 6:1; χαρά, Ac 8:8, many other similar exx.; ἡμέρα, Lk 22:66, al.; ὀψέ, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γίνομαι (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot. on for Attic γίγνομαι) ; [impf. ἐγινόμην ; fut. γενήσομαι ; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. γένοιτο ; [ptep. yevapevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in signif., 1 aor. pass. ἐγενήθην, rejected by the Atticists (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts iv. 4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, etc.), impv. γενηθήτω (Mt. vi. 10; xv. 28, ete.) ; pf. γεγένημαι and γέγονα, 3 pers. plur. γέγοναν L T Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rey. xxi. 6 (cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p. 37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73) sq-; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. γεγονώς] ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγεγόνει (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.];. Acts iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH γεγόνει, cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29); Tdf.’s note on…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γίνομαι {Ξ ΠῚ. p. 210) γενοῦ πρὸς "Ata τὸν ποιμένα καὶ δέξαι παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ δραχμὰς διακοσίας, P Flor II. 180 (a.p. 253) ἐὰν γένηται πρός σε Διόσκορος, α΄. Γίνομαι sometimes supplies an aorist fir εἰμί : ἐγενόμην is normally ingressive (= became), but has to serve on occasion for summary (‘‘constative ’’) aorist as well—cf. Prolfeg. p. 109. Thus P. Flor III. 382% (cited ad 72.) might be translated ‘the son whom I neither have nor ever had,’’ as well as ‘‘ nor was ever born to me.” Lk 13? is an instance of this summary use. It appears in a very common technical usage, by which γενόμενος, with the tithe of an official, etc., denotes “ex-’’: where the title forms a verb, the aor, the perf.) partic. of this is used instead. arch” is γυμνασιαρχήσας. For the periphrasis cf. P Oxy I. 3811 (a.p. 49-50) (= Selections, p. 53) καθὰ π|ζα]ρῆλθον ἐπὶ τοῦ γενομένου τοῦ νομοῦ στρατηγοῦ Ilaciwyvos, “1…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γίνομαι (ginomai) — to be.

γίγνομαι,

Ionic dialect and after [Refs 4th c.BC+] γίνομαι [ῑ], (Attic dialect Inscrr. have γιγν- in fifth and fourth cententury,[Refs]; Thess. γίνυμαι [Refs]; Boeotian dialect γίνιουμαι [Refs]future γενήσομαι: aorist ἐγενόμην (ἐγενάμην [LXX] (προ-) Decrees Byzantine cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+], Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular γένευ [Refs 8th c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular γενέσκετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect γέντο [Refs 8th c.BC+] (gṇ-το): perfect γέγονα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. plural γέγοναν [NT]: pluperfect ἐγεγόνει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἐγεγόνεε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect forms (as if from perfect γέγᾰα), 2nd pers. plural γεγάᾱτε [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐκ-γεγάτην [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive γεγάμεν [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle γεγᾰώς -ᾰυῖα, plural -ᾰῶτες, -ᾰυῖαι [Refs 8th c.BC+], contraction γεγώς, -ῶσα [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γίνομαι

ginomai

a prolongation and middle voice form of a primary verb; to cause to be

("gen"-erate), i.e. (reflexively) to become (come into being), used

with great latitude (literal, figurative, intensive, etc.):--arise, be

assembled, be(-come, -fall, -have self), be brought (to pass), (be)

come (to pass), continue, be divided, draw, be ended, fall, be

finished, follow, be found, be fulfilled, + God forbid, grow, happen,

have, be kept, be made, be married, be ordained to be, partake, pass,

be performed, be published, require, seem, be showed, X soon as it

was, sound, be taken, be turned, use, wax, will, would, be wrought.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γίνομαι

v.

I come into being, am born

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γίνομαι ginomai 669x

pluperfect, ἐγενόει (3rd sg), to come into existence; to be created, exist by creation, Jn. 1:3, 10; Heb. 11:3; Jas. 3:9; to be born, produced, grow, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 8:58, et al.; to arise, come on, occur, as the phenomena of nature, etc.; Mt. 8:24, 26; 9:16, et al.; to come, approach, as morning or evening, Mt. 8:16; 14:15, 23; to be appointed, constituted, established, Mk. 2:27; Gal.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2ADI-3S — Verb · second aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist middle deponent indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2ADI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%it came to pass
it came to pass9% · 64×became4% · 28×there was3% · 23×do be3% · 22×came3% · 19×having become3% · 18×was3% · 18×having been3% · 17×other renderings69% · 468×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 180 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb57%linking verb42%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 668 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
θάλασσαthe sea, lakeἐκεῖthere, yonder, tεἰμίI am, exist
Article the
δύναμιςmight, power, maεἰμίI am, existαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ὄψιοςlateοὗτοςὡςas, like as, how
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, sοὐNegθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
ἱμάτιονouter garmentδιάκλάδοςa branch
γίνομαιthere was668×
what comes after →
Article the
δύναμιςmight, power, maθέλημαwill, wish, desiἔσχατοςlast, at the las
ἐν
Article theσύεἷςone
δέbut, on the other ha
ἐνArticle theἡμέραa day
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegἐκφύωI put forth, cau
εἰς
Article theκεφαλήthe headδένδρονa tree

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγίνομαι · 668× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Matthew Mark John 1 Corinthians Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 Thessalonians Galatians 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

πρὸς δὲ τὸ μὴ γεγονὸς οἰκείωσις οὐδεμία τῷ μὴ πεποιηκότι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς ὁ κατακλυσμὸς ἐγένετο καὶ ὃν τρόπον Νῶχος σωθεὶς ἐν λάρνακι μετὰ τῶν συγγενῶν κατῴκησεν ἐν τῷ Σινάρῳ πεδίῳ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.11c. AD 100

γενώμεθα πνευματικοί, γενώμεθα ναὸς τέλειος τῷ θεῷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 22Thebais119 BC

ἔχω εἰς τὸν Ἑρμίου λόγον περὶ πῆς τοπογραμματείας τοῦ νγ ἔτους χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ περὶ τῆς κωμογραμματείας ὁμοίως χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος ἐκρίθη

P.Adl. 10Pathyris102 BC

λ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ φαλάνθῳ ἀριστερῶι χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα δέκα δύο, γίνεται τάλαντα ιβ, ἄτοκα, ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀπὸ μηνὸς Παῦνι ιθ. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω

Having come to [Him] then they awoke Him saying; Master Master, we are perishing! <the> And having arisen up He rebuked the wind and the raging of the water. and they ceased, and there was a calm.
γαλήνη.¶galēnē a calm. G1055 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Calm means a state of tranquility, as when Jesus calmed the storm in Matthew 8:26 and Mark 4:39. It describes a peaceful condition, free from disturbance.
Amplified meaning
peaceful, serene
Tyndale gloss
calm
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γαλήνη (galēnē) means calmness or tranquility, particularly in reference to the sea. It appears in the New Testament in contexts describing stillness during storms (e.g., Mt 8:26, Mk 4:39, Lk 8:24). The term has a broader literary usage, indicating serenity of mind and peacefulness, with uncertain derivation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* γαλήνη, -ης, ἡ,

a calm: Mt 8:26, Mk 4:39, Lk 8:24.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γαλήνη, -ns, ἡ, (adj. 6, ἡ, γαληνός calm, cheerful), calmness, stillness of the sea, a calm: Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. viii. 24. (From Hom. down.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γαλήνη. The adj. is found OG/S 519! (111.Α.10.) πάντων. .. ἤρεμον καὶ γαληνὸν τὸν βίον δια[γόντων. In the late papyri γαληνότης is common as an honorific title, e.g. P Oxy VIL. 10427 (A.D. 578) μετὰ τὴν δευτέραν ὑπατίαν τῆς αὐτῶν γαληνότητί(ος), ‘after the second consulship of his [? their] serenity.” (Ed.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γαλήνη (galēnē) — calm.

γᾰλήν-η, ἡ,

stillness of the sea, calm (γ. μὲν ἐν θαλάσσῃ νηνεμία δ᾽ ἐν ἀέρι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἱ δ᾽ ἐλόωσι γαλήνην will sail the calm sea, [Refs]; stillness of deep waters, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: metaphorically of the mind, calmness, serenity, φρόνημα νηνέμου γαλάνας [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐν γαλήνῃ in calm, quiet, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. lead sulphide, galena, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

III. name of an antidote, [Refs 1st c.AD+] accusative to [Refs 6th c.AD+]; perhaps akin to γελάω.)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

γαλήνη

galene

of uncertain derivation; tranquillity:--calm.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γαλήνη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

a calm

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γαλήνη galēnē 3x

tranquillity of the sea, a calm, Mt. 8:26; Mk. 4:39; Lk. 8:24*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γαλήνη Deriv. uncertain: perh. akin to γελάω. stillness of the sea, calm, Od.; λευκὴ γ. id. Od.; ἐλόωσι γαλήνην will sail the calm sea, i. e. over it, id. Od.:—metaph., φρόνημα νηνέμου γαλάνας spirit of serenest calm, Aesch.; ἐν γαλήνηι in calm, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%calm
calm100% · 3×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
γίνομαιI come into being, a
καίand, even, also,
γαλήνηa calm.
what comes after →
μέγας

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγαλήνη · 3× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 63c. AD 40

καὶ τὰ μὲν εὐδίᾳ καὶ γαλήνῃ σφριγᾷ, τὰ δὲ κλύδωνι καὶ κυματώσει·

JosephusThe Jewish War 3.195c. AD 75–95

πρέπειν δʼ αὐτῷ μήτε φυγεῖν τοὺς ἐχθροὺς μήτʼ ἐγκαταλιπεῖν τοὺς φίλους μήτʼ ἀποπηδᾶν ὥσπερ χειμαζομένης νεώς, εἰς ἣν ἐν γαλήνῃ παρῆλθεν·

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate